WO2020147054A1 - Indication method for data replication and transmission, terminal device, and network device - Google Patents

Indication method for data replication and transmission, terminal device, and network device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020147054A1
WO2020147054A1 PCT/CN2019/072056 CN2019072056W WO2020147054A1 WO 2020147054 A1 WO2020147054 A1 WO 2020147054A1 CN 2019072056 W CN2019072056 W CN 2019072056W WO 2020147054 A1 WO2020147054 A1 WO 2020147054A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
logical channel
transmission
information
status
mode
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/072056
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
石聪
Original Assignee
Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 filed Critical Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority to CN201980057236.XA priority Critical patent/CN112655234B/en
Priority to PCT/CN2019/072056 priority patent/WO2020147054A1/en
Publication of WO2020147054A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020147054A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/15Setup of multiple wireless link connections
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • H04W8/22Processing or transfer of terminal data, e.g. status or physical capabilities
    • H04W8/24Transfer of terminal data

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of information processing technology, in particular to an instruction method for data replication and transmission, terminal equipment, network equipment, and computer storage media, chips, computer readable storage media, computer program products, and computer programs.
  • enhanced mobile broadband eMBB, Enhance Mobile Broadband
  • mMTC massive Machine Type of Communication
  • uRLLC ultra-reliable, low-latency communication
  • Ultra Reliable&Low Latency Communication Ultra Reliable&Low Latency Communication
  • the system can implement a more flexible and effective data replication method, which brings the following challenges or problems to the existing technology: it needs to support the logic of the same bearer
  • the number of legs supported by data replication (the number of legs supported by R15 is 1,2).
  • Data replication and transmission can only support a maximum of two logical channels/RLC entities, and this does not match the requirement of more than two logical channels/RLC entities in R16. Therefore, corresponding solutions need to be considered.
  • embodiments of the present invention provide an instruction method for data copy transmission, terminal equipment, network equipment, and computer storage media, chips, computer readable storage media, computer program products, and computer programs.
  • a method for indicating data replication transmission which is applied to a network device, and the method includes:
  • a method for instructing data replication and transmission which is applied to a terminal device, and the method includes:
  • Receiving first information wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission state; and/or, the first information is used To determine the binding information for data replication and transmission.
  • a network device including:
  • the first communication unit sends first information to the terminal device; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/ Or, the first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission.
  • a terminal device including:
  • the second communication unit receives first information; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, The first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission.
  • a network device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a terminal device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the method in the second aspect or its implementations.
  • a chip is provided, which is used to implement any one of the foregoing first aspect and second aspect or the method in each implementation manner thereof.
  • the chip includes: a processor for calling and running a computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes any one of the above-mentioned first aspect, second aspect, or each of its implementations method.
  • a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program that causes a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first and second aspects or various implementations thereof.
  • a computer program product which includes computer program instructions, which cause the computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first and second aspects or various implementations thereof.
  • a computer program which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first and second aspects or various implementations thereof.
  • the indicated object can be determined through the first information, the indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding relationship between logical channels, The binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB and the binding relationship between carriers and logical channels or carriers; thereby providing a multi-dimensional data replication transmission control method that reduces indication overhead, thereby reducing air interface signaling Overhead, reduce the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increase the flexible control mode of data replication and transmission.
  • Figure 1-1 is a schematic diagram 1 of a communication system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 1-2 is a schematic diagram of an architecture for replication transmission
  • Figure 1-3 is a schematic diagram of the MAC CE format
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flow chart 1 of a method for indicating data copy transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the second flow of the method for indicating data copy transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of another structure of replication transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram 1 of the information format provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a second schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a third schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a fourth schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a fifth schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a sixth schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a third flowchart of a method for indicating data copy transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a fourth flowchart of a method for indicating data copy transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the composition structure of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a chip provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram 2 of a communication system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile Communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • the communication system 100 applied in the embodiment of the present application may be as shown in FIG. 1-1.
  • the communication system 100 may include a network device 110, and the network device 110 may be a device that communicates with a terminal device 120 (or referred to as a communication terminal, terminal).
  • the network device 110 can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area, and can communicate with terminal devices located within the coverage area.
  • the network device 110 may be a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in a GSM system or a CDMA system, a base station (NodeB, NB) in a WCDMA system, or an evolved base station in an LTE system (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB), or a wireless controller in the Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN), or the network equipment can be a mobile switching center, a relay station, an access point, an in-vehicle device, Wearable devices, hubs, switches, bridges, routers, network-side devices in 5G networks or network devices in future public land mobile networks (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN), etc.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • NodeB, NB base station
  • LTE Long Term Evolutional Node B
  • eNodeB evolved base station in an LTE system
  • CRAN Cloud Radio Access Network
  • the network equipment can be a mobile switching center, a relay station, an access point, an in-veh
  • the communication system 100 also includes at least one terminal device 120 within the coverage of the network device 110.
  • terminal equipment includes, but is not limited to, connections via wired lines, such as via Public Switched Telephone Networks (PSTN), Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL), digital cables, and direct cable connections ; And/or another data connection/network; and/or via wireless interfaces, such as for cellular networks, wireless local area networks (Wireless Local Area Network, WLAN), digital TV networks such as DVB-H networks, satellite networks, AM- FM broadcast transmitter; and/or another terminal device configured to receive/transmit communication signals; and/or Internet of Things (IoT) equipment.
  • PSTN Public Switched Telephone Networks
  • DSL Digital Subscriber Lines
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • digital TV networks such as DVB-H networks, satellite networks, AM- FM broadcast transmitter
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • a terminal device set to communicate through a wireless interface may be referred to as a "wireless communication terminal", “wireless terminal”, or “mobile terminal”.
  • mobile terminals include, but are not limited to, satellite or cellular telephones; Personal Communication Systems (PCS) terminals that can combine cellular radiotelephones with data processing, facsimile, and data communication capabilities; may include radiotelephones, pagers, Internet/internal PDA with networked access, web browser, notepad, calendar, and/or Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver; and conventional laptop and/or palm-type receivers or others including radiotelephone transceivers Electronic device.
  • PCS Personal Communication Systems
  • GPS Global Positioning System
  • Terminal equipment can refer to access terminals, user equipment (UE), user units, user stations, mobile stations, mobile stations, remote stations, remote terminals, mobile equipment, user terminals, terminals, wireless communication equipment, user agents, or User device.
  • Access terminals can be cellular phones, cordless phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) stations, personal digital processing (Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in 5G networks, or terminal devices in PLMNs that will evolve in the future, etc.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • direct terminal connection (Device to Device, D2D) communication may be performed between the terminal devices 120.
  • the 5G system or 5G network may also be referred to as a New Radio (NR) system or NR network.
  • NR New Radio
  • Figure 1-1 exemplarily shows one network device and two terminal devices.
  • the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices and the coverage of each network device may include other numbers of terminal devices. The embodiment of the application does not limit this.
  • the communication system 100 may further include other network entities such as a network controller, a mobility management entity, etc. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the devices with communication functions in the network/system in the embodiments of the present application may be referred to as communication devices.
  • the communication device may include a network device 110 with communication functions and a terminal device 120.
  • the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 may be the specific devices described above.
  • the communication device may also include other devices in the communication system 100, such as other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • RLC entities RLC entities
  • the number of corresponding RLC entities can be at least one: 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.
  • the solution that supports data duplication utilizes the data duplication function of PDCP, so that the duplicate PDCP PDU is transmitted to two RLC entities (two different logical channels), and finally the duplicate PDCP PDU can be guaranteed It is transmitted on aggregated carriers of different physical layers to achieve frequency diversity gain to improve data transmission reliability.
  • DRB 1 and DRB 3 in Figure 1-2.
  • the solution supporting data duplication utilizes the data duplication function of PDCP, so that the copied PDCP PDU is transmitted to two RLC entities respectively, and the two RLC entities respectively correspond to different MAC entities.
  • DRB2 as shown in Figure 1-2.
  • the uplink PDCP data replication function can be configured based on DRB, that is, with DRB granularity, the replication data transmission is configured to control whether the replication data transmission is activated or deactivated.
  • the network can dynamically activate or deactivate the data copy transmission function of a certain data radio bearer through the MAC CE .
  • the MAC CE contains an 8-bit Bitmap. The bits in the bitmap correspond to different DRBs. The different values in the bits indicate the activation or deactivation of the corresponding DRB data copy data.
  • the existing technology can only support a maximum of 2 legs, which does not match the requirement of R16 for more than two legs.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides an instruction method for data replication transmission, which is applied to a network device, as shown in FIG. 2, including:
  • Step 201 Send first information to the terminal device; where the first information is used to characterize the binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, The first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission;
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the object is one of a bearer, an RLC (Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol) entity, a logical channel, and a carrier.
  • RLC Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol
  • the use of the same copy transmission state for the above objects means that the objects indicated by the first information all use the copy transmission state, or they do not use the copy transmission state.
  • the use of the copy transmission mode may specifically be that the logical channel is in the active state, that is, the copy transmission is in the active state; if the copy transmission mode is not used, the logical channel may be in the deactivated state, that is, the copy transmission is not performed. status.
  • the binding relationship between the logical channels includes one of the following:
  • the second type mode information of at least two logical channels is not limited.
  • the logical channel is a configured logical channel that can be used to transmit a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP, Packet Data Convergence Protocol)) protocol data unit (PDU, Protocol Data Unit) and/or its replicated data.
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • PDU Protocol Data Unit
  • the logical channel may be any logical channel of the terminal device.
  • the logical channels paired with the logical channels may belong to different cell groups (CG, Cell Group), or may belong to the same CG. And/or, the paired logical channels may correspond to different bearers or the same bearer.
  • the logical channel is leg.
  • legs when data is copied and transmitted, a data packet of a PDCP entity can be transmitted by multiple RLC entities or logical channels, and one of the corresponding RLC entities or logical channels can become a leg.
  • the number of legs is n, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same replication transmission or non-replication transmission status; specifically, the bound logical channel and the logical channel paired with it
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status is the same, that is, the replication data is transmitted or the replication data is not transmitted.
  • the first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes
  • the status of the transmission with or without copying is the same or different.
  • at least one mode may have two modes, such as a first mode and a second mode, namely mode 1 and mode 2.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation states of the logical channels of different modes may be the same or different.
  • the second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying.
  • the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated.
  • the full mode is full mode
  • the selection mode is select mode.
  • the full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels into a group, and the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents the logical channel unpaired group, and the logical channel requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data .
  • the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel between each full mode can be the same or different, for example, the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel of the first full mode and the second full mode Different; the first full mode and the third full mode have the same logical channel with or without copying transmission status.
  • the first information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission, which means that the terminal device can determine the binding information between objects through the related information indicated in the first information.
  • the first information indicates that logical channel 1 is a bound logical channel, or logical channel 1 is a full-mode channel
  • logical channels 3 and 4 also indicate a full-mode logical channel; that is, the terminal device can Based on the first information for the logical channels 1, 3, and 4, it is determined that the logical channels 1, 3, and 4 have a binding relationship.
  • Other granularities are handled in the same way. For example, for DRB or carrier, you can also set the binding identifier for it.
  • DRB Data Resource Bearer
  • SRB Signal Resource Bearer
  • the network side can specifically determine whether to use the data replication transmission mode and the related configuration information of the data replication transmission mode for the base station.
  • the first information is mandatory configuration or optional optional configuration.
  • the network side may be the base station, determine the data replication transmission mode used, and notify the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information; the first information is used to indicate the binding relationship between the logical channels.
  • the bound logical channel has the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status as the paired logical channel, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
  • this processing method includes sub-scheme 1:
  • the sending the first information to the terminal device includes:
  • the configuration information includes the binding information of the logical channel; when the binding information indicated in the configuration information is true, it indicates that the logical channel is at least with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission.
  • the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel sent by the network side base station to the terminal device indicates the binding information. If the binding indication information is True, it represents logical channel binding. Further, the terminal device may set all logical channels whose binding indication information is True as a group. By indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
  • the network side can use the media access control (MAC, Media Access Control) control element (CE, Control Element), radio resource control (RRC, Radio Resource Control) message, and downlink control information (DCI, DownLink Control Information).
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • CE Control Element
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • One of the methods instructs the terminal equipment to use replication transmission or non-use replication transmission status of the logical channel; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following information: logical channel identifier, and cell corresponding to the logical channel Group CG identification.
  • Another way of sending instructions may be: the configuration message further includes: the group identifier bound to the logical channel; the method further includes: indicating the logical channel to the terminal device through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI Use copy transmission or not use copy transmission state; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the group identifier bound to the logical channel, the logical channel identifier, and the cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel is at least One.
  • the configuration message sent to the terminal device from the network side also indicates the bound group identifier.
  • the message indicating the update such as the MAC CE, carries at least one of the bound group identifier, logical channel identifier, and cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
  • the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 will be bound with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3.
  • the new information element (IE) boundFlag the format can be as follows: boundFlag-r16BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, --Need R. specific:
  • This processing method can also include sub-scheme 2:
  • the sending the first information to the terminal device includes:
  • the configuration information contains the identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel, and/or The CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
  • the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel indicates the identifier of the logical channel bound to it, and/or the CG identifier to which the bound logical channel belongs.
  • the bound logical channels are a group, indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
  • the method further includes: indicating to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the following At least one: the logical channel and the CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
  • the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 can be configured with boundLogicalChannels IE and CG-Idendity.
  • a new IE is used to configure the bound logical channel identifier corresponding to the logical channel and the cell group identifier to which the bound logical channel identifier belongs.
  • the first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information.
  • the advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment.
  • the specific IE format please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be described here.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station (ie, the network side), configures the RLC entity according to the first information in the RRC message, and confirms the pairing information and/or according to the first information Paired logical channel.
  • the terminal device transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the initial copy data transmission method can be included in the configuration information sent from the network side. Of course, it can also be the default initial copy data transmission method of the terminal device. It can be activated or deactivated, that is, use the copy transmission method or not. Copy the transmission method. Further, in the initial transmission mode configuration, the RLC entity used for activation or deactivation can be configured.
  • the base station determines that it is necessary to change the data replication mode, such as when the data replication transmission is activated/deactivated, the base station instructs the terminal device to change the status of the replication data transmission to activation or deactivation through dedicated information.
  • the dedicated information can be MAC CE, RRC, or DCI signaling.
  • the terminal device receives a data copy mode change indication message from the base station. For example, when the terminal device is instructed to activate/deactivate the corresponding bearer data copy transmission through the MAC CE, the terminal device determines the activation or deactivation according to the corresponding bit information in the MAC CE Operation, subsequent data transmission is performed according to the updated data copy transmission activation/deactivation status.
  • MAC CE, RRC, and DCI can be shown in Figures 5 and 6, taking MAC CE as an example.
  • a new LCID can be introduced in the MAC CE subheader to indicate replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling New format.
  • A/D Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits copy data.
  • LogicalchannelIdetity Represents the indicated logical channel identifier.
  • CG-ID Represents the cell group identifier to which the indicated logical channel belongs.
  • At least one mode is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel, that is, the state of activation or deactivation; this solution uses two modes as examples for illustration, namely the first mode and the second mode, specific:
  • MAC CE Through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI to indicate to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode, and/or, the status of using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode or Do not use copy transfer status.
  • the first information may be mode type information of a logical channel, including mode 1, mode 2.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the indication bits used are different.
  • the RRC configuration such as IE BoundMode, is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel bonding, and it can be "BoundMode-r16ENUMERATED ⁇ 1,2,3,4 ⁇ OPTIONAL,--Need R" to indicate the bonding mode. See the following for details:
  • different rows are used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the first mode uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status, and/or is used to indicate the second mode corresponds to The status of the logical channel using copy transmission or not using copy transmission.
  • the first row and the second row may or may not be adjacent. Of course, the first row and the second row may be from top to bottom, or from bottom to top.
  • the first row represents whether the logical channel of mode 1 transmits copy data
  • the second row represents whether the logical channel of mode 2 transmits copy data.
  • the first information may be mode information of a logical channel, including full mode and select mode.
  • full mode represents a logical channel paired with other logical channels to form a group
  • the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data
  • select mode represents a logical channel unpaired group, which requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data.
  • the logical channel is configured as full mode, it means that the paired logical channels have the same activation/deactivation status, or the paired logical channels are all activated, or the paired logical channels are all deactivated.
  • the logical channel is configured as select mode, it means that there is no pairing, and a separate bit is needed to indicate whether to transmit copy data.
  • the mode information determine the RLC entity activation mode that can be finally supported. For example, configure 4 logical channels/RLC entities, and the modes of channels 0, 1, 2 and 3 are full, select, full, and select respectively, so that all supported combinations of RLC activation are as follows (0 represents the corresponding RLC entity activation , 1 represents the deactivation of the corresponding RLC entity, the order is RLC entity 0, RLC entity 1, RLC entity 2, RLC entity 3): (0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0), (1 ,1,1,0), (1,0,1,1), (1,1,1,1). For example, for these 5 combinations, you can use the select mode corresponding to the 3 bits in the row Value to indicate.
  • the leg combination mode or the combination mode of all RLC activations may be notified to the terminal equipment by the base station, or may be predefined.
  • At least one bit in the first row is used to indicate the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and/or, through the second row
  • the different bits in indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission respectively corresponding to at least one logical channel corresponding to the selection mode.
  • the first row in Figure 7 represents whether the logical channel of full mode transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of select mode transmits copy data; or, as shown in Figure 8, in the information Middle A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits replicated data;
  • LogicalchannelIdetity Represents the indicated logical channel identifier;
  • CG-ID Represents the Cell Group ID to which the indicated logical channel belongs;
  • Index Represents which of the corresponding indications can be used to transmit replicated data Logical channel combination.
  • the DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB;
  • the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the bound SRB and/or DRB and its paired DRB and/or SRB is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the network side determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and informs the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information used to indicate that the first information is the binding between bearers (DRB and/or SRB) relationship.
  • the bound bearer is in the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation state as its paired bearer, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
  • configuring the binding of DRB1 and DRB2 means that if the use of DRB is instructed to replicate data transmission, DRB2 also uses the same replicated data transmission.
  • the RRC IE is as follows: for example, in the RadioBearerConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, a newly added IE, boundDRBs, is used to configure the identity of the bearer bound to this bearer. For example, ""boundSRBs-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxDRB-1))OF SRB-Identity OPTIONAL,--Need R" and/or "boundDRBs-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxDRB-1))OFDRB- Identity OPTIONAL, --Need R" are used to indicate the information of the bound DRB. Specifically, such as:
  • the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information.
  • the advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the pairing information and the paired bearer information according to the first information.
  • the terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the method also includes:
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
  • the MAC CE can be in the following format:
  • a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling.
  • A/D represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data
  • DRB-identity represents the indicated DRB identity.
  • the binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel transmits replicated data by indicating whether the carrier uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status.
  • the first information is the binding information between the carrier and the carried logical channel.
  • a carrier-based activation/deactivation method can be used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the bearer transmits duplicate data. It should be noted here that when the logical channel indicated by the carrier is used to transmit replicated data, the bearer corresponding to the logical channel may or may not be the same bearer.
  • the base station determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information, which is used to indicate that the first information is the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel (LC).
  • the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
  • LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 are transmitted through carrier 1, indicating whether the carrier uses replicated data transmission, representing whether LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 use replicated data transmission.
  • IE allowedServingCells determine the carrier and the binding relationship with the logical channel
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the logical channel and the carrier according to the first information.
  • the terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the method also includes:
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  • a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling.
  • A/D represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data
  • ServCellIndex represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) identifier
  • CG-ID represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) belongs to the cell group identifier.
  • the binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers with the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or no copy transmission status.
  • the first information is the carrier and the binding information between the carriers.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the indicated carrier and the carrier paired with the carrier can be used to be the same, that is, both the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the base station determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information, which is used to indicate that the first information is the carrier and the binding relationship between the carriers.
  • the carrier and the carrier have the same data copy transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit copy data or not transmit copy data.
  • the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel is determined according to the information of the carrier corresponding to the allowed use of the logical channel.
  • the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
  • a combination with the third processing method may be used, and the first information carries the carrier and the carrier, and the binding relationship between the carrier and the LC.
  • carrier 1 and carrier 2 are bound, by indicating whether carrier 1 uses replicated data transmission, and whether carrier 2 of the same generation uses replicated data transmission.
  • the logical channel or RLC entity that uses the carrier to transmit the copied data adopts the same data data transmission method (activation/deactivation)
  • the base station adds an IE, boundServingCells, to the CellGroupConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, which is used to indicate the carrier bound to this carrier.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the carriers according to the first information.
  • the terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the format of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is the same as the third processing method. Specifically, one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to change the data copy transmission; one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI One carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits duplicate data.
  • the format of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is explained. Since the prior art can only support data replication and transmission with a maximum of 2 legs, this does not match the requirement of R16 for more than two legs. And only supports one-bit activation/deactivation indication method. This method can only realize that all legs transmit replicated data (activation), or all legs do not transmit replicated data (deactivate, and only retain the main leg to transmit PDCP PDU Original) instruction result. However, once the base station wants to indicate different activation/deactivation behaviors (transmission or non-transmission) to different legs, it cannot perform the instruction. Therefore, the embodiment of the present invention introduces new dedicated information indication methods, such as the introduction of new MAC CE, RRC messages, and DCI formats. Each leg (logical channel) corresponding to each bearer uses a 1-bit indication to indicate whether the leg is Transfer copy data (activate/deactivate).
  • One of the optional formats of the new MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is as follows:
  • Different columns correspond to different DRB IDs, or carrier IDs, or cell group IDs to which the carriers belong, and the corresponding methods are consistent with existing protocols; different rows correspond to a certain DRB, or carrier ID, or the cell group ID to which the carrier belongs.
  • Different RLC entities the value in the bit represents whether the RLC entity is used to transmit replicated data; the following is described by DRB:
  • Number of rows max ⁇ the number of RLC entities/logical channels used to copy data output for any bearer configuration ⁇ .
  • the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 0 is 4, and the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 3 is 8, the MAC CE The number of rows is 8.
  • the number of rows the number of restricted RLC entities/logical channels used for transmitting replicated data for each bearer, and this value may be a preset value or a value configured by RRC.
  • MCG has 2 DRBs configured with copy data transmission function, and the DRB IDs are 0, 3, 5, and 7 respectively;
  • the format of MAC CE is 4 bytes, so from column 1 to column 4 corresponding to these DRBs in ascending order of DRB ID at a time.
  • columns D0, D1, D2, and D3 correspond to DRB ID 0, 3, 5, and 7, respectively.
  • Different rows in each column indicate which RLC entities are used to transmit replicated data.
  • a maximum of 4 RLC entities may be used to transmit replicated data. Sort in the order of MCG first, then SCG, and sort the logical channel ID in ascending or descending order within each CG. Or, sort according to the order of SCG first and then MCG, and sort the logical channel IDs in ascending or descending order within each CG. For example, for each row of DRB0, from top to bottom, they represent RLC entities 0, 1, 2, and 3.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines and executes the data copy transmission configuration according to the first information and transmits according to the initial mode, it receives the instruction sent by the network side base station through the MAC CE of the new format, and the terminal device determines the data transmission according to the MAC CE instruction. Whether a leg transmits copied data.
  • the indicated object can be determined through the first information.
  • the indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding between logical channels.
  • the overhead of signaling reduces the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increases flexible control methods for data replication and transmission.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides an instruction method for data copy transmission, which is applied to a terminal device, as shown in FIG. 12, including:
  • Step 301 Receive first information; where the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, the first information One piece of information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission;
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the object is one of a bearer, an RLC (Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol) entity, a logical channel, and a carrier.
  • RLC Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol
  • the use of the copy transmission mode may specifically be that the logical channel is in the active state, that is, the copy transmission is in the active state; if the copy transmission mode is not used, the logical channel may be in the deactivated state, that is, the copy transmission is not performed. status.
  • the binding relationship between the logical channels includes one of the following:
  • the second type mode information of at least two logical channels is not limited.
  • the logical channel is a configured logical channel that can be used to transmit PDCP PDU and/or copy data thereof.
  • the logical channel may be any logical channel of the terminal device.
  • the logical channels paired with the logical channels may belong to different cell groups (CG, Cell Group), or may belong to the same CG. And/or, the paired logical channels may correspond to different bearers or the same bearer.
  • the logical channel is leg.
  • legs when data is copied and transmitted, a data packet of a PDCP entity can be transmitted by multiple RLC entities or logical channels, and one of the corresponding RLC entities or logical channels can become a leg.
  • the number of legs is n, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same replication transmission or non-replication transmission status; specifically, the bound logical channel and the logical channel paired with it
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status is the same, that is, the replication data is transmitted or not.
  • the first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes
  • the status of the transmission with or without copying is the same or different.
  • at least one mode may have two modes, such as a first mode and a second mode, namely mode 1 and mode 2.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation states of the logical channels of different modes may be the same or different.
  • the second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying.
  • the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated.
  • the full mode is full mode
  • the selection mode is select mode.
  • the full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels into a group, and the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents the logical channel unpaired group, and the logical channel requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data .
  • the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel between each full mode can be the same or different, for example, the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel of the first full mode and the second full mode Different; the first full mode and the third full mode have the same logical channel with or without copying transmission status.
  • the first information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission, which means that the terminal device can determine the binding information between objects through the related information indicated in the first information.
  • the first information indicates that logical channel 1 is a bound logical channel, or logical channel 1 is a full-mode channel
  • logical channels 3 and 4 also indicate a full-mode logical channel; that is, the terminal device can Based on the first information for the logical channels 1, 3, and 4, it is determined that the logical channels 1, 3, and 4 have a binding relationship.
  • Other granularities are handled in the same way. For example, for DRB or carrier, you can also set the binding identifier for it. When other SRB and/or DRB are also set with the corresponding binding identifier, the difference between DRB and SRB and/or DRB There is a binding relationship between them; I will not repeat them here.
  • the network side can specifically determine whether to use the data replication transmission mode and the related configuration information of the data replication transmission mode for the base station.
  • the first information is mandatory configuration or optional optional configuration.
  • the network side may be the base station, determine the data replication transmission mode used, and notify the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information; the first information is used to indicate the binding relationship between the logical channels.
  • the bound logical channel is the same as the data replication transmission activation/deactivation state of its paired logical channel, that is, both transmit the copied data or not transmit the copied data.
  • this processing method includes sub-scheme 1:
  • the receiving the first information includes:
  • configuration information is used to indicate the first information; wherein the configuration information includes the binding information of the logical channels; when the configuration information indicates When the binding information of is true, it characterizes that the logical channel is one of at least two logical channels with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
  • the binding information of at least two logical channels is determined, and the at least two logical channels are controlled to transmit according to the initial replication data transmission mode.
  • the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel sent by the network side base station to the terminal device indicates the binding information. If the binding indication information is True, it represents logical channel binding. Further, the terminal device may set all logical channels whose binding indication information is True as a group. By indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
  • the network side can receive the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission state of the logical channel indicated by the network side through one of the MAC control elements CE, RRC message, and DCI;
  • one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following information: a logical channel identifier, and a cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
  • Another way of sending an indication may be: the configuration message further includes: a group identifier bound to the logical channel; the method further includes:
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the group identifier bound to the logical channel, the logical channel identifier, and the cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
  • the configuration message sent to the terminal device from the network side also indicates the bound group identifier.
  • the message indicating the update such as the MAC CE, carries at least one of the bound group identifier, logical channel identifier, and cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
  • the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 will be bound with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3.
  • the format of the new information element (IE) boundFlag is the same as in the first embodiment, and the description will not be repeated.
  • processing method may also include sub-solution 2:
  • the receiving the first information includes:
  • the configuration information includes the identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel, and/or, and The CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
  • the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel indicates the identifier of the logical channel bound to it, and/or the CG identifier to which the bound logical channel belongs.
  • the bound logical channels are a group, indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
  • the method further includes: obtaining, through one of the MAC control element CE, RRC message, and DCI, the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel indicated by the network side;
  • one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: a logical channel and a CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
  • the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 can be configured with boundLogicalChannels IE and CG-Idendity.
  • a new IE is used to configure the bound logical channel identifier corresponding to the logical channel and the cell group identifier to which the bound logical channel identifier belongs.
  • the IE is used to indicate the bound logical channel, which may include a logical channel identifier (LogicalChannelIdentity) and a cell group identifier (CG-identity).
  • the specific IE content may be the same as in the first embodiment, and will not be repeated.
  • the first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information.
  • the advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment.
  • the specific IE format please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be described here.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station (ie, the network side), configures the RLC entity according to the first information in the RRC message, and confirms the pairing information and/or according to the first information Paired logical channel.
  • the terminal device transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the initial copy data transmission method can be included in the configuration information sent from the network side. Of course, it can also be the default initial copy data transmission method of the terminal device. It can be activated or deactivated, that is, use the copy transmission method or not. Copy the transmission method. Further, in the initial transmission mode configuration, the RLC entity used for activation or deactivation can be configured.
  • the base station determines that it is necessary to change the data replication mode, such as when the data replication transmission is activated/deactivated, the base station instructs the terminal device to change the status of the replication data transmission to activation or deactivation through dedicated information.
  • the dedicated information can be MAC CE, RRC, or DCI signaling.
  • the terminal device receives a data copy mode change indication message from the base station. For example, when the terminal device is instructed to activate/deactivate the corresponding bearer data copy transmission through the MAC CE, the terminal device determines the activation or deactivation according to the corresponding bit information in the MAC CE Operation, subsequent data transmission is performed according to the updated data copy transmission activation/deactivation status.
  • MAC CE, RRC, and DCI can be shown in Figures 5 and 6, taking MAC CE as an example.
  • a new LCID can be introduced in the MAC CE subheader to indicate replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling New format.
  • A/D Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits copy data.
  • LogicalchannelIdetity Represents the indicated logical channel identifier.
  • CG-ID Represents the cell group identifier to which the indicated logical channel belongs.
  • At least one mode is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel, that is, the state of activation or deactivation; this solution uses two modes as examples for illustration, namely the first mode and the second mode, specific:
  • the first information may be mode type information of a logical channel, including mode 1, mode 2.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the indication bits used are different.
  • the RRC configuration for example, IE BoundMode, is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel binding.
  • IE BoundMode is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel binding.
  • different rows are used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the first mode uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status, and/or is used to indicate the second mode corresponds to The status of the logical channel using copy transmission or not using copy transmission.
  • the first row and the second row may or may not be adjacent. Of course, the first row and the second row may be from top to bottom, or from bottom to top.
  • the first row represents whether the logical channel of mode 1 transmits copy data
  • the second row represents whether the logical channel of mode 2 transmits copy data.
  • the first information may be mode information of a logical channel, including full mode and select mode.
  • full mode represents a logical channel paired with other logical channels to form a group
  • the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data
  • select mode represents a logical channel unpaired group, which requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data.
  • the logical channel is configured as full mode, it means that the paired logical channels have the same activation/deactivation status, or the paired logical channels are all activated, or the paired logical channels are all deactivated.
  • the logical channel is configured as select mode, it means that there is no pairing, and a separate bit is needed to indicate whether to transmit copy data.
  • the mode information determine the RLC entity activation mode that can be finally supported. For example, configure 4 logical channels/RLC entities, and the modes of channels 0, 1, 2 and 3 are full, select, full, and select respectively, so that all supported combinations of RLC activation are as follows (0 represents the corresponding RLC entity activation , 1 represents the deactivation of the corresponding RLC entity, the order is RLC entity 0, RLC entity 1, RLC entity 2, RLC entity 3): (0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0), (1 ,1,1,0), (1,0,1,1), (1,1,1,1). For example, for these 5 combinations, you can use the select mode corresponding to the 3 bits in the row Value to indicate.
  • the leg combination mode or the combination mode of all RLC activations may be notified to the terminal equipment by the base station, or may be predefined.
  • At least one bit in the first row is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and the difference in the second row The bit indicates the copy transmission or non-copy transmission state corresponding to at least one logical channel corresponding to the selection mode.
  • the first row in Figure 7 represents whether the logical channel of full mode transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of select mode transmits copy data; or, as shown in Figure 8, in the information Middle A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits replicated data;
  • LogicalchannelIdetity Represents the indicated logical channel identifier;
  • CG-ID Represents the Cell Group ID to which the indicated logical channel belongs;
  • Index Represents which of the corresponding indications can be used to transmit replicated data Logical channel combination.
  • the DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB;
  • the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the bound SRB and/or DRB and its paired DRB and/or SRB is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the network side determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and informs the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information used to indicate that the first information is the binding between bearers (DRB and/or SRB) relationship.
  • the bound bearer is in the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation state as its paired bearer, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
  • configuring the binding of DRB1 and DRB2 means that if the use of DRB is instructed to replicate data transmission, DRB2 also uses the same replicated data transmission.
  • the RRC IE is as follows: for example, in the RadioBearerConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, a newly added IE, boundDRBs, is used to configure the identity of the bearer bound to this bearer. The details are the same as in the first embodiment and will not be repeated.
  • the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information.
  • the advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the pairing information and the paired bearer information according to the first information.
  • the terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the method also includes:
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
  • the MAC CE can be in the following format:
  • a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling.
  • A/D represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data
  • DRB-identity represents the indicated DRB identity.
  • the binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel transmits replicated data by indicating whether the carrier uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status.
  • the first information is the binding information between the carrier and the carried logical channel.
  • a carrier-based activation/deactivation method can be used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the bearer transmits duplicate data. It should be noted here that when the logical channel indicated by the carrier is used to transmit replicated data, the bearer corresponding to the logical channel may or may not be the same bearer.
  • the base station determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information, which is used to indicate that the first information is the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel (LC).
  • the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
  • LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 are transmitted through carrier 1, indicating whether the carrier uses replicated data transmission, representing whether LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 use replicated data transmission.
  • IE allowedServingCells determine the carrier and the binding relationship with the logical channel
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the logical channel and the carrier according to the first information.
  • the terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the method also includes:
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  • a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling.
  • A/D represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data
  • ServCellIndex represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) identifier
  • CG-ID represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) belongs to the cell group identifier.
  • the binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers with the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or no copy transmission status.
  • the first information is the carrier and the binding information between the carriers.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the indicated carrier and the carrier paired with the carrier can be used to be the same, that is, both the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the base station determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information, which is used to indicate that the first information is the carrier and the binding relationship between the carriers.
  • the carrier and the carrier have the same data copy transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit copy data or not transmit copy data.
  • the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel is determined according to the information of the carrier corresponding to the allowed use of the logical channel.
  • the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
  • a combination with the third processing method may be used, and the first information carries the carrier and the carrier, and the binding relationship between the carrier and the LC.
  • carrier 1 and carrier 2 are bound, by indicating whether carrier 1 uses replicated data transmission, and whether carrier 2 of the same generation uses replicated data transmission.
  • the logical channel or RLC entity that uses the carrier to transmit the copied data adopts the same data transmission method (activation/deactivation)
  • the base station adds an IE, boundServingCells, to the CellGroupConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, which is used to indicate the carrier bound to this carrier.
  • an IE, boundServingCells to the CellGroupConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, which is used to indicate the carrier bound to this carrier.
  • it can be the same as the first embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the carriers according to the first information.
  • the terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the format of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is the same as the third processing method, specifically, the change instruction of the data copy transmission indicated by the network side is obtained through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  • the format of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is explained. Since the prior art can only support data replication and transmission with a maximum of 2 legs, this does not match the requirement of R16 for more than two legs. And only supports one-bit activation/deactivation indication method. This method can only realize that all legs transmit replicated data (activation), or all legs do not transmit replicated data (deactivate, and only retain the main leg to transmit PDCP PDU Original) instruction result. However, once the base station wants to indicate different activation/deactivation behaviors (transmission or non-transmission) to different legs, it cannot perform the instruction. Therefore, the embodiment of the present invention introduces new dedicated information indication methods, such as the introduction of new MAC CE, RRC messages, and DCI formats. Each leg (logical channel) corresponding to each bearer uses 1 bit indication to indicate whether the leg is Transfer copy data (activate/deactivate).
  • One of the optional formats of the new MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is as follows:
  • Different columns correspond to different DRB IDs, or carrier IDs, or cell group IDs to which the carriers belong, and the corresponding methods are consistent with existing protocols; different rows correspond to a certain DRB, or carrier ID, or the cell group ID to which the carrier belongs.
  • Different RLC entities the value in the bit represents whether the RLC entity is used to transmit replicated data; the following is described by DRB:
  • Number of rows max ⁇ the number of RLC entities/logical channels used to copy data output for any bearer configuration ⁇ .
  • the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 0 is 4, and the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 3 is 8, the MAC CE The number of rows is 8.
  • the number of rows the number of restricted RLC entities/logical channels used for transmitting replicated data for each bearer, and this value may be a preset value or a value configured by RRC.
  • MCG has 2 DRBs configured with copy data transmission function, and the DRB IDs are 0, 3, 5, and 7 respectively;
  • the format of MAC CE is 4 bytes, so from column 1 to column 4 corresponding to these DRBs in ascending order of DRB ID at a time.
  • columns D0, D1, D2, and D3 correspond to DRB ID 0, 3, 5, and 7, respectively.
  • Different rows in each column indicate which RLC entities are used to transmit replicated data.
  • a maximum of 4 RLC entities may be used to transmit replicated data. Sort in the order of MCG first, then SCG, and sort the logical channel ID in ascending or descending order within each CG. Or, sort according to the order of SCG first and then MCG, and sort the logical channel IDs in ascending or descending order within each CG. For example, for each row of DRB0, from top to bottom, they represent RLC entities 0, 1, 2, and 3.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines and executes the data copy transmission configuration according to the first information and transmits according to the initial mode, it receives the instruction sent by the network side base station through the MAC CE of the new format, and the terminal device determines the data transmission according to the MAC CE instruction. Whether a leg transmits copied data.
  • the indicated object can be determined through the first information.
  • the indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding between logical channels.
  • the overhead of signaling reduces the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increases flexible control methods for data replication and transmission.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, as shown in FIG. 13, including:
  • the first communication unit 41 sends first information to the terminal device; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission state; and /Or, the first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission;
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the object is one of a bearer, an RLC (Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol) entity, a logical channel, and a carrier.
  • RLC Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol
  • the use of the copy transmission mode may specifically be that the logical channel is in the active state, that is, the copy transmission is in the active state; if the copy transmission mode is not used, the logical channel may be in the deactivated state, that is, the copy transmission is not performed. status.
  • the binding relationship between the logical channels includes one of the following:
  • the second type mode information of at least two logical channels is not limited.
  • the logical channel is a configured logical channel that can be used to transmit PDCP PDU and/or copy data thereof.
  • the logical channel may be any logical channel of the terminal device.
  • the logical channels paired with the logical channels may belong to different cell groups (CG, Cell Group), or may belong to the same CG. And/or, the paired logical channels may correspond to different bearers or the same bearer.
  • the logical channel is leg.
  • legs when data is copied and transmitted, a data packet of a PDCP entity can be transmitted by multiple RLC entities or logical channels, and one of the corresponding RLC entities or logical channels can become a leg.
  • the number of legs is n, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same replication transmission or non-replication transmission status; specifically, the bound logical channel and the logical channel paired with it
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status is the same, that is, the replication data is transmitted or the replication data is not transmitted.
  • the first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes
  • the status of the transmission with or without copying is the same or different.
  • at least one mode may have two modes, such as a first mode and a second mode, namely mode 1 and mode 2.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation states of the logical channels of different modes may be the same or different.
  • the second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying.
  • the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated.
  • the full mode is full mode
  • the selection mode is select mode.
  • the full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels into a group, and the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents the logical channel unpaired group, and the logical channel requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data .
  • the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel between each full mode can be the same or different, for example, the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel of the first full mode and the second full mode Different; the first full mode and the third full mode have the same logical channel with or without copying transmission status.
  • the first information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission, which means that the terminal device can determine the binding information between objects through the related information indicated in the first information.
  • the first information indicates that logical channel 1 is a bound logical channel, or logical channel 1 is a full-mode channel
  • logical channels 3 and 4 also indicate a full-mode logical channel; that is, the terminal device can Based on the first information for the logical channels 1, 3, and 4, it is determined that the logical channels 1, 3, and 4 have a binding relationship.
  • Other granularities are handled in the same way. For example, for DRB or carrier, you can also set the binding identifier for it. When other SRB and/or DRB are also set with the corresponding binding identifier, the difference between DRB and SRB and/or DRB There is a binding relationship between them; I will not repeat them here.
  • the network side can specifically determine whether to use the data replication transmission mode and the related configuration information of the data replication transmission mode for the base station.
  • the first information is mandatory configuration or optional optional configuration.
  • the network side may be the base station, determine the data replication transmission mode used, and notify the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information; the first information is used to indicate the binding relationship between the logical channels.
  • the bound logical channel is the same as the data replication transmission activation/deactivation state of its paired logical channel, that is, both transmit the copied data or not transmit the copied data.
  • this processing method includes sub-scheme 1:
  • the network equipment also includes:
  • the first processing unit 42 determines that there are at least two logical channels with the same status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission; the first communication unit 41 is sending configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels to the terminal device, so The configuration information is used to indicate the first information;
  • the configuration information includes the binding information of the logical channel; when the binding information indicated in the configuration information is true, it indicates that the logical channel is at least with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission.
  • the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel sent by the network side base station to the terminal device indicates the binding information. If the binding indication information is True, it represents logical channel binding. Further, the terminal device may set all logical channels whose binding indication information is True as a group. By indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
  • the first communication unit 41 can indicate to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel through one of the MAC control elements CE, RRC message, and DCI; wherein, the MAC CE, RRC message, One of the DCIs carries at least one of the following information: a logical channel identifier, and a cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
  • Another way of sending instructions may be: the configuration message further includes: the group identifier bound to the logical channel; the first communication unit 41 indicates the logic to the terminal device through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI Channel use replication transmission or non-use replication transmission status; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the group identifier bound to the logical channel, the logical channel identifier, and the cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel At least one.
  • the configuration message sent to the terminal device from the network side also indicates the bound group identifier.
  • the message indicating the update such as the MAC CE, carries at least one of the bound group identifier, logical channel identifier, and cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
  • the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 will be bound with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3.
  • the format of the new information element (IE) boundFlag is the same as that in the first embodiment, and will not be repeated.
  • processing method may also include sub-solution 2:
  • the first processing unit 42 determines at least two logical channels with the same activation or deactivation state
  • the first communication unit 41 sends configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels to the terminal device; the configuration information includes the identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel, And/or, the CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
  • the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel indicates the identifier of the logical channel bound to it, and/or the CG identifier to which the bound logical channel belongs.
  • the bound logical channels are a group, indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
  • the first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel through one of the MAC control elements CE, RRC message, and DCI; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI One carries at least one of the following: the logical channel and the CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
  • the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 can be configured with boundLogicalChannels IE and CG-Idendity.
  • a new IE is used to configure the bound logical channel identifier corresponding to the logical channel and the cell group identifier to which the bound logical channel identifier belongs.
  • the IE is used to indicate the bound logical channel, which may include a logical channel identifier (LogicalChannelIdentity) and a cell group identifier (CG-identity). For example, it may be as shown in Embodiment 1, and will not be repeated here.
  • the first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information.
  • the advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment.
  • the specific IE format please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be described here.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station (ie, the network side), configures the RLC entity according to the first information in the RRC message, and confirms the pairing information and/or according to the first information Paired logical channel.
  • the terminal device transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the initial copy data transmission method can be included in the configuration information sent from the network side. Of course, it can also be the default initial copy data transmission method of the terminal device. It can be activated or deactivated, that is, use the copy transmission method or not. Copy the transmission method. Further, in the initial transmission mode configuration, the RLC entity used for activation or deactivation can be configured.
  • the first processing unit 42 determines that it is necessary to change the data replication mode, such as when data replication transmission is activated/deactivated, the first communication unit 41 instructs the terminal device to change the status of the replication data transmission to activation or deactivation through dedicated information.
  • the dedicated information can be MAC CE, RRC, or DCI signaling.
  • MAC CE, RRC, and DCI can be shown in Figures 5 and 6, taking MAC CE as an example.
  • a new LCID can be introduced in the MAC CE sub-header to indicate replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling New format.
  • A/D in Figure 6 Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data.
  • LogicalchannelIdetity Represents the indicated logical channel identifier.
  • CG-ID Represents the cell group identifier to which the indicated logical channel belongs.
  • At least one mode is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel, that is, the state of activation or deactivation; this solution uses two modes as examples for illustration, namely the first mode and the second mode, specific:
  • the first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device the use of replication transmission or non-use replication transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, and/or the logic corresponding to the second mode The channel's use copy transmission or not use copy transmission status.
  • the first information may be mode type information of a logical channel, including mode 1, mode 2.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the indication bits used are different.
  • the RRC configuration for example, IE BoundMode, is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel binding.
  • IE BoundMode is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel binding.
  • different rows are used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the first mode uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status, and/or is used to indicate the second mode corresponds to The status of the logical channel using copy transmission or not using copy transmission.
  • the first row and the second row may or may not be adjacent. Of course, the first row and the second row may be from top to bottom, or from bottom to top.
  • the first row represents whether the logical channel of mode 1 transmits copy data
  • the second row represents whether the logical channel of mode 2 transmits copy data.
  • the first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device the use of copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, and/or the selection of the logical channel corresponding to the mode Use copy transfer or not use copy transfer status.
  • the first information may be mode information of a logical channel, including full mode and select mode.
  • full mode represents a logical channel paired with other logical channels to form a group
  • the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data
  • select mode represents a logical channel unpaired group, which requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data.
  • the logical channel is configured as full mode, it means that the paired logical channels have the same activation/deactivation status, or the paired logical channels are all activated, or the paired logical channels are all deactivated.
  • the logical channel is configured as select mode, it means that there is no pairing, and a separate bit is needed to indicate whether to transmit copy data.
  • the mode information determine the RLC entity activation mode that can be finally supported. For example, configure 4 logical channels/RLC entities, and the modes of channels 0, 1, 2 and 3 are full, select, full, and select respectively, so that all supported combinations of RLC activation are as follows (0 represents the corresponding RLC entity activation , 1 represents the deactivation of the corresponding RLC entity, the order is RLC entity 0, RLC entity 1, RLC entity 2, RLC entity 3): (0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0), (1 ,1,1,0), (1,0,1,1), (1,1,1,1). For example, for these 5 combinations, you can use the select mode corresponding to the 3 bits in the row Value to indicate.
  • the leg combination mode or the combination mode of all RLC activations may be notified to the terminal equipment by the base station, or may be predefined.
  • At least one bit in the first row is used to indicate the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and/or, through the second row
  • the different bits in indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission respectively corresponding to at least one logical channel corresponding to the selection mode.
  • the first row in Figure 7 represents whether the logical channel of full mode transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of select mode transmits copy data; or, as shown in Figure 8, in the information Middle A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits replicated data;
  • LogicalchannelIdetity Represents the indicated logical channel identifier;
  • CG-ID Represents the Cell Group ID to which the indicated logical channel belongs;
  • Index Represents which of the corresponding indications can be used to transmit replicated data Logical channel combination.
  • the DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB;
  • the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the bound SRB and/or DRB and its paired DRB and/or SRB is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the network side determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and informs the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information used to indicate that the first information is the binding between bearers (DRB and/or SRB) relationship.
  • the bound bearer is in the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation state as its paired bearer, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
  • configuring the binding of DRB1 and DRB2 means that if the use of DRB is instructed to replicate data transmission, DRB2 also uses the same replicated data transmission.
  • RadioBearerConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, a newly added IE, boundDRBs, is used to configure the identity of the bearer bound to this bearer. See Example 1 for details.
  • the first communication unit 41 notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the first communication unit 41 adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information.
  • the advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the pairing information and the paired bearer information according to the first information.
  • the terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device a change instruction of data copy transmission through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
  • the MAC CE can be in the following format:
  • a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling.
  • A/D represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data
  • DRB-identity represents the indicated DRB identity.
  • the binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel transmits replicated data by indicating whether the carrier uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status.
  • the first information is the binding information between the carrier and the carried logical channel.
  • a carrier-based activation/deactivation method can be used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the bearer transmits duplicate data. It should be noted here that when the logical channel indicated by the carrier is used to transmit replicated data, the bearer corresponding to the logical channel may or may not be the same bearer.
  • the first processing unit determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information used to indicate that the first information is the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel (LC). Specifically, the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
  • LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 are transmitted through carrier 1, indicating whether the carrier uses replicated data transmission, representing whether LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 use replicated data transmission.
  • IE allowedServingCells determine the carrier and the binding relationship with the logical channel
  • the first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device a change instruction of data copy transmission through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  • a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling.
  • A/D represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data
  • ServCellIndex represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) identifier
  • CG-ID represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) belongs to the cell group identifier.
  • the binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers with the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or no copy transmission status.
  • the first information is the carrier and the binding information between the carriers.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the indicated carrier and the carrier paired with the carrier can be used to be the same, that is, both the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the formats of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI are the same as the third processing mode, specifically the first communication unit 41 instructs the terminal device to change the data copy transmission instruction through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
  • One of the RRC message and the DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  • the embodiment of the present invention introduces new dedicated information indication methods, such as the introduction of new MAC CE, RRC messages, and DCI formats, corresponding to each leg (logical Channels) each use a 1-bit indicator to indicate whether the leg transmits copy data (activation/deactivation).
  • One of the optional formats of the new MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is as follows:
  • Different columns correspond to different DRB IDs, or carrier IDs, or cell group IDs to which the carriers belong, and the corresponding methods are consistent with existing protocols; different rows correspond to a certain DRB, or carrier ID, or the cell group ID to which the carrier belongs.
  • Different RLC entities the value in the bit represents whether the RLC entity is used to transmit replicated data; the following is described by DRB:
  • Number of rows max ⁇ the number of RLC entities/logical channels used to copy data output for any bearer configuration ⁇ .
  • the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 0 is 4, and the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 3 is 8, the MAC CE The number of rows is 8.
  • the number of rows the number of restricted RLC entities/logical channels used for transmitting replicated data for each bearer, and this value may be a preset value or a value configured by RRC.
  • MCG has 2 DRBs configured with copy data transmission function, and the DRB IDs are 0, 3, 5, and 7 respectively;
  • the format of MAC CE is 4 bytes, so from column 1 to column 4 corresponding to these DRBs in ascending order of DRB ID at a time.
  • columns D0, D1, D2, and D3 correspond to DRB ID 0, 3, 5, and 7, respectively.
  • Different rows in each column indicate which RLC entities are used to transmit replicated data.
  • a maximum of 4 RLC entities may be used to transmit replicated data. Sort in the order of MCG first, then SCG, and sort the logical channel ID in ascending or descending order within each CG. Or, sort according to the order of SCG first and then MCG, and sort the logical channel IDs in ascending or descending order within each CG. For example, for each row of DRB0, from top to bottom, they represent RLC entities 0, 1, 2, and 3.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines and executes the data copy transmission configuration according to the first information and transmits according to the initial mode, it receives the instruction sent by the network side base station through the MAC CE of the new format, and the terminal device determines the data transmission according to the MAC CE instruction. Whether a leg transmits copied data.
  • the indicated object can be determined through the first information.
  • the indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding between logical channels.
  • the overhead of signaling reduces the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increases flexible control methods for data replication and transmission.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a terminal device, as shown in FIG. 14, including:
  • the second communication unit 51 receives first information; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission state; and/or, The first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission;
  • the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the object is one of a bearer, an RLC (Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol) entity, a logical channel, and a carrier.
  • RLC Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol
  • the use of the copy transmission mode may specifically be that the logical channel is in the active state, that is, the copy transmission is in the active state; if the copy transmission mode is not used, the logical channel may be in the deactivated state, that is, the copy transmission is not performed. status.
  • the binding relationship between the logical channels includes one of the following:
  • the second type mode information of at least two logical channels is not limited.
  • the logical channel is a configured logical channel that can be used to transmit PDCP PDU and/or copy data thereof.
  • the logical channel may be any logical channel of the terminal device.
  • the logical channels paired with the logical channels may belong to different cell groups (CG, Cell Group), or may belong to the same CG. And/or, the paired logical channels may correspond to different bearers or the same bearer.
  • the logical channel is leg.
  • legs when data is copied and transmitted, a data packet of a PDCP entity can be transmitted by multiple RLC entities or logical channels, and one of the corresponding RLC entities or logical channels can become a leg.
  • the number of legs is n, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same replication transmission or non-replication transmission status; specifically, the bound logical channel and the logical channel paired with it
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status is the same, that is, the replication data is transmitted or the replication data is not transmitted.
  • the first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes
  • the status of the transmission with or without copying is the same or different.
  • at least one mode may have two modes, such as a first mode and a second mode, namely mode 1 and mode 2.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation states of the logical channels of different modes may be the same or different.
  • the second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying.
  • the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated.
  • the full mode is full mode
  • the selection mode is select mode.
  • the full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels into a group, and the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents the logical channel unpaired group, and the logical channel requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data .
  • the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel between each full mode can be the same or different, for example, the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel of the first full mode and the second full mode Different; the first full mode and the third full mode have the same logical channel with or without copying transmission status.
  • the first information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission, which means that the terminal device can determine the binding information between objects through the related information indicated in the first information.
  • the first information indicates that logical channel 1 is a bound logical channel, or logical channel 1 is a full-mode channel
  • logical channels 3 and 4 also indicate a full-mode logical channel; that is, the terminal device can Based on the first information for the logical channels 1, 3, and 4, it is determined that the logical channels 1, 3, and 4 have a binding relationship.
  • Other granularities are handled in the same way. For example, for DRB or carrier, you can also set the binding identifier for it. When other SRB and/or DRB are also set with the corresponding binding identifier, the difference between DRB and SRB and/or DRB There is a binding relationship between them; I will not repeat them here.
  • the network side can specifically determine whether to use the data replication transmission mode and the related configuration information of the data replication transmission mode for the base station.
  • the first information is mandatory configuration or optional optional configuration.
  • the network side may be the base station, determine the data replication transmission mode used, and notify the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information; the first information is used to indicate the binding relationship between the logical channels.
  • the bound logical channel is the same as the data replication transmission activation/deactivation state of its paired logical channel, that is, both transmit the copied data or not transmit the copied data.
  • this processing method includes sub-scheme 1:
  • the second communication unit 51 receives configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels, where the configuration information is used to indicate the first information; wherein, the configuration information includes binding information of the logical channels When the binding information indicated in the configuration information is true, it indicates that the logical channel is one of at least two logical channels with the same state of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
  • the binding information of at least two logical channels is determined, and the at least two logical channels are controlled to transmit according to the initial replication data transmission mode.
  • the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel sent by the network side base station to the terminal device indicates the binding information. If the binding indication information is True, it represents logical channel binding. Further, the terminal device may set all logical channels whose binding indication information is True as a group. By indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
  • the second communication unit 51 receives, through one of the MAC control element CE, the RRC message, and the DCI, the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel indicated by the network side;
  • one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following information: a logical channel identifier, and a cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
  • Another way to send instructions may be: the configuration message further includes: the group identifier bound to the logical channel; the second communication unit 51 receives the logic indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI Channel use copy transmission or not use copy transmission status;
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the group identifier bound to the logical channel, the logical channel identifier, and the cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
  • the configuration message sent to the terminal device from the network side also indicates the bound group identifier.
  • the message indicating the update such as the MAC CE, carries at least one of the bound group identifier, logical channel identifier, and cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
  • processing method may also include sub-solution 2:
  • the second communication unit 51 receives configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels sent by the network side; the configuration information includes the logical channel bound to the first logical channel And/or the CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
  • the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel indicates the identifier of the logical channel bound to it, and/or the CG identifier to which the bound logical channel belongs.
  • the bound logical channels are a group, indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
  • the method further includes: obtaining, through one of the MAC control element CE, RRC message, and DCI, the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel indicated by the network side;
  • one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: a logical channel and a CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
  • the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 can be configured with boundLogicalChannels IE and CG-Idendity.
  • the first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • MAC CE, RRC, and DCI can be shown in Figures 5 and 6, taking MAC CE as an example.
  • a new LCID can be introduced in the MAC CE subheader to indicate replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling New format.
  • A/D Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits copy data.
  • LogicalchannelIdetity Represents the indicated logical channel identifier.
  • CG-ID Represents the cell group identifier to which the indicated logical channel belongs.
  • At least one mode is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel, that is, the state of activation or deactivation; this solution uses two modes as examples for illustration, namely the first mode and the second mode, specific:
  • the second communication unit 51 through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, obtains the status of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode using replication transmission or not using replication transmission, and/or the status of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode Use copy transfer or not use copy transfer status.
  • the first information may be mode type information of a logical channel, including mode 1, mode 2.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the indication bits used are different.
  • the RRC configuration for example, IE BoundMode, is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel binding.
  • IE BoundMode is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel binding.
  • different rows are used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the first mode uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status, and/or is used to indicate the second mode corresponds to The status of the logical channel using copy transmission or not using copy transmission.
  • the first row and the second row may or may not be adjacent. Of course, the first row and the second row may be from top to bottom, or from bottom to top.
  • the first row represents whether the logical channel of mode 1 transmits copy data
  • the second row represents whether the logical channel of mode 2 transmits copy data.
  • the second communication unit 51 obtains the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, and the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the selected mode. Use copy transfer status.
  • the first information may be mode information of a logical channel, including full mode and select mode.
  • full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels to form a group.
  • the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data
  • select mode represents a logical channel unpaired group, which requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data.
  • the logical channel is configured as full mode, it means that the paired logical channels have the same activation/deactivation status, or the paired logical channels are all activated, or the paired logical channels are all deactivated.
  • the logical channel is configured as select mode, it means that there is no pairing, and a separate bit is needed to indicate whether to transmit copy data.
  • the mode information determine the RLC entity activation mode that can be finally supported. For example, configure 4 logical channels/RLC entities, and the modes of channels 0, 1, 2 and 3 are full, select, full, and select respectively, so that all supported combinations of RLC activation are as follows (0 represents the corresponding RLC entity activation , 1 represents the deactivation of the corresponding RLC entity, the order is RLC entity 0, RLC entity 1, RLC entity 2, RLC entity 3): (0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0), (1 ,1,1,0), (1,0,1,1), (1,1,1,1). For example, for these 5 combinations, you can use the select mode corresponding to the 3 bits in the row Value to indicate.
  • the leg combination mode or the combination mode of all RLC activations may be notified to the terminal equipment by the base station, or may be predefined.
  • At least one bit in the first row is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and the difference in the second row The bit indicates the copy transmission or non-copy transmission state corresponding to at least one logical channel corresponding to the selection mode.
  • the first row in Figure 7 represents whether the logical channel of full mode transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of select mode transmits copy data; or, as shown in Figure 8, in the information Middle A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits replicated data;
  • LogicalchannelIdetity Represents the indicated logical channel identifier;
  • CG-ID Represents the Cell Group ID to which the indicated logical channel belongs;
  • Index Represents which of the corresponding indications can be used to transmit replicated data Logical channel combination.
  • the DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB;
  • the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the bound SRB and/or DRB and its paired DRB and/or SRB is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the second communication unit 51 obtains all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal device also includes a second processing unit 52, which receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the pairing information and the paired bearer information according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the second communication unit 51 obtains the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
  • the MAC CE can be in the following format:
  • a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling.
  • A/D represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data
  • DRB-identity represents the indicated DRB identity.
  • the binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel transmits replicated data by indicating whether the carrier uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status.
  • the first information is the binding information between the carrier and the carried logical channel.
  • a carrier-based activation/deactivation method can be used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the bearer transmits duplicate data. It should be noted here that when the logical channel indicated by the carrier is used to transmit replicated data, the bearer corresponding to the logical channel may or may not be the same bearer.
  • the second communication unit 51 receives the RRC message from the base station, and the second processing unit 52 configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the logical channel and the carrier according to the first information.
  • the terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
  • the second communication unit 51 obtains the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  • a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling.
  • A/D represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data
  • ServCellIndex represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) identification
  • CG-ID represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) belongs to the cell group identification.
  • the binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers with the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or no copy transmission status.
  • the first information is the carrier and the binding information between the carriers.
  • the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the indicated carrier and the carrier paired with the carrier can be used to be the same, that is, both the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
  • the second communication unit 51 obtains the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
  • One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  • the indicated object can be determined through the first information.
  • the indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding between logical channels.
  • the overhead of signaling reduces the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increases flexible control methods for data replication and transmission.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may be the aforementioned terminal device or network device in this embodiment.
  • the communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 includes a processor 610, and the processor 610 can call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the method in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 may further include a memory 620.
  • the processor 610 can call and run a computer program from the memory 620 to implement the method in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the memory 620 may be a separate device independent of the processor 610, or may be integrated in the processor 610.
  • the communication device 600 may further include a transceiver 630, and the processor 610 may control the transceiver 630 to communicate with other devices. Specifically, it may send information or data to other devices, or receive other devices. Information or data sent by the device.
  • the transceiver 630 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 630 may further include antennas, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
  • the communication device 600 may specifically be a network device according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 600 may implement the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. .
  • the communication device 600 may specifically be a terminal device or a network device in an embodiment of the application, and the communication device 600 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the application. It's concise, so I won't repeat it here.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip of an embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 700 shown in FIG. 16 includes a processor 710, and the processor 710 can call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 700 may further include a memory 720.
  • the processor 710 can call and run a computer program from the memory 720 to implement the method in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the memory 720 may be a separate device independent of the processor 710, or may be integrated in the processor 710.
  • the chip 700 may further include an input interface 730.
  • the processor 710 can control the input interface 730 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
  • the chip 700 may further include an output interface 740.
  • the processor 710 can control the output interface 740 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can output information or data to other devices or chips.
  • the chip can be applied to the network device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip can implement the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding process implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip can implement the corresponding process implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • chips mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as system-level chips, system chips, chip systems, or system-on-chip chips.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system 800 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17, the communication system 800 includes a terminal device 810 and a network device 820.
  • the terminal device 810 can be used to implement the corresponding function implemented by the terminal device in the above method
  • the network device 820 can be used to implement the corresponding function implemented by the network device in the above method.
  • the processor of the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments may be completed by instructions in the form of hardware integrated logic circuits or software in the processor.
  • the aforementioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA ready-made programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module may be located in a mature storage medium in the art, such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory, an electrically erasable programmable memory, and a register.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be Read-Only Memory (ROM), Programmable Read-Only Memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), and Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced SDRAM ESDRAM
  • Synchlink DRAM SLDRAM
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may also be static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data) SDRAM (DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection Dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM) and so on. That is to say, the memories in the embodiments of the present application are intended to include but are not limited to these and any other suitable types of memories.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer programs.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application, for simplicity And will not be repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.
  • the computer program product may be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. Repeat again.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application, For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
  • the embodiment of the application also provides a computer program.
  • the computer program can be applied to the network device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the computer program runs on the computer, the computer is allowed to execute the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. And will not be repeated here.
  • the computer program can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the computer program runs on the computer, the computer executes each method in the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, the corresponding process will not be repeated here.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or part of the contribution to the existing technology or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory,) ROM, random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Abstract

Disclosed in the present invention are an indication method for data replication and transmission, a terminal device, a network device, a computer storage medium, a chip, a computer readable storage medium, a computer program product, and a computer program. The method comprises: sending first information to a terminal device, wherein the first information is used for representing binding information for data replication and transmission, and objects indicated in the first information use the same replication and transmission state; and/or, the first information is used for determining the binding information for data replication and transmission.

Description

一种数据复制传输的指示方法、终端设备及网络设备Indication method for data copy transmission, terminal equipment and network equipment 技术领域Technical field
本发明涉及信息处理技术领域,尤其涉及一种数据复制传输的指示方法、终端设备、网络设备及计算机存储介质、芯片、计算机可读存储介质、计算机程序产品以及计算机程序。The present invention relates to the field of information processing technology, in particular to an instruction method for data replication and transmission, terminal equipment, network equipment, and computer storage media, chips, computer readable storage media, computer program products, and computer programs.
背景技术Background technique
在5G中根据业务需求分为3大应用场景,增强型移动宽带(eMBB,Enhance Mobile Broadband)、mMTC(海量机器类通信,massive Machine Type of Communication)、uRLLC(超可靠、低时延通信,Ultra Reliable&Low Latency Communication)。在Release15URLLC议题中,考虑并处理的是高可靠低时延的业务。在Rel-16中,扩大了研究对象,最终,IIoT立项考虑数据复制传输和多连接(Data duplication and multi-connectivity)。According to business requirements, 5G is divided into 3 major application scenarios, enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB, Enhance Mobile Broadband), mMTC (massive Machine Type of Communication), uRLLC (ultra-reliable, low-latency communication, Ultra Reliable&Low Latency Communication). In the issue of Release15URLLC, high-reliability and low-latency services are considered and processed. In Rel-16, the research object is expanded, and finally, the IIoT project considers data duplication transmission and multi-connectivity (Data duplication and multi-connectivity).
Release16对数据复制传输特性提出了一种更高的需求,系统可以实现一种更为灵活更有效的数据复制方式,对现有技术带来如下挑战或者问题如下:需要支持对于同一个承载的逻辑信道/无线链路控制(RLC,Radio Link Control)实体数目(R16支持的leg数目为至少1个,包括逻辑信道/RLC实体数据=1,2,3,4,5..)大于现有的数据复制支持的leg数目(R15支持的leg数为1,2)。Release 16 puts forward a higher demand for data replication and transmission characteristics. The system can implement a more flexible and effective data replication method, which brings the following challenges or problems to the existing technology: it needs to support the logic of the same bearer The number of channel/radio link control (RLC, Radio Link Control) entities (the number of legs supported by R16 is at least 1, including logical channel/RLC entity data = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5..) is greater than the existing The number of legs supported by data replication (the number of legs supported by R15 is 1,2).
对数据复制传输只能支持逻辑信道/RLC实体数最多为2,而这与R16多于两个逻辑信道/RLC实体的需求是不匹配的,因此,需要考虑相应的解决方案。Data replication and transmission can only support a maximum of two logical channels/RLC entities, and this does not match the requirement of more than two logical channels/RLC entities in R16. Therefore, corresponding solutions need to be considered.
发明内容Summary of the invention
为解决上述技术问题,本发明实施例提供了一种数据复制传输的指示方法、终端设备、网络设备及计算机存储介质、芯片、计算机可读存储介质、计算机程序产品以及计算机程序。To solve the above technical problems, embodiments of the present invention provide an instruction method for data copy transmission, terminal equipment, network equipment, and computer storage media, chips, computer readable storage media, computer program products, and computer programs.
第一方面,提供了一种数据复制传输的指示方法,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:In the first aspect, a method for indicating data replication transmission is provided, which is applied to a network device, and the method includes:
向终端设备发送第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息。Send first information to the terminal device; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, the first information One piece of information is used to determine binding information for data replication and transmission.
第二方面,提供了一种数据复制传输的指示方法,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:In a second aspect, a method for instructing data replication and transmission is provided, which is applied to a terminal device, and the method includes:
接收第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息。Receiving first information; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission state; and/or, the first information is used To determine the binding information for data replication and transmission.
第三方面,提供了一种网络设备,包括:In the third aspect, a network device is provided, including:
第一通信单元,向终端设备发送第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息。The first communication unit sends first information to the terminal device; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/ Or, the first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission.
第四方面,提供了一种终端设备,包括:In a fourth aspect, a terminal device is provided, including:
第二通信单元,接收第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息。The second communication unit receives first information; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, The first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission.
第五方面,提供了一种网络设备,包括处理器和存储器。该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行上述第一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a fifth aspect, a network device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第六方面,提供了一种终端设备,包括处理器和存储器。该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行上述第二方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a sixth aspect, a terminal device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the method in the second aspect or its implementations.
第七方面,提供了一种芯片,用于实现上述第一方面、第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, a chip is provided, which is used to implement any one of the foregoing first aspect and second aspect or the method in each implementation manner thereof.
具体地,该芯片包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有该芯片的设备执行如上述第一方面、第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。Specifically, the chip includes: a processor for calling and running a computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes any one of the above-mentioned first aspect, second aspect, or each of its implementations method.
第八方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序使得计算机执行上述第一方面、第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。According to an eighth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided for storing a computer program that causes a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first and second aspects or various implementations thereof.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行上述第一方面、第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided, which includes computer program instructions, which cause the computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first and second aspects or various implementations thereof.
第十方面,提供了一种计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面、第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。According to a tenth aspect, there is provided a computer program which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first and second aspects or various implementations thereof.
通过采用上述方案,能够通过第一信息确定所指示的对象,所指示的对象具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输的状态,并且第一信息中能够指示逻辑信道之间的绑定关系、DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系以及载波与逻辑信道或载波之间的绑定关系;从而提供了减少指示开销的、多种维度的数据复制传输控制方式,进而减少了空口信令的开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度,增加数据复制传输的灵活控制方式。By adopting the above solution, the indicated object can be determined through the first information, the indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding relationship between logical channels, The binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB and the binding relationship between carriers and logical channels or carriers; thereby providing a multi-dimensional data replication transmission control method that reduces indication overhead, thereby reducing air interface signaling Overhead, reduce the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increase the flexible control mode of data replication and transmission.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION
图1-1是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统架构的示意性图一;Figure 1-1 is a schematic diagram 1 of a communication system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图1-2是复制传输的一种架构示意图;Figure 1-2 is a schematic diagram of an architecture for replication transmission;
图1-3是MAC CE格式示意图;Figure 1-3 is a schematic diagram of the MAC CE format;
图2是本申请实施例提供的数据复制传输的指示方法流程示意图一;FIG. 2 is a schematic flow chart 1 of a method for indicating data copy transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的数据复制传输的指示方法流程示意图二;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the second flow of the method for indicating data copy transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的复制传输的另一种架构示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of another structure of replication transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的信息格式示意图一;Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram 1 of the information format provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的信息格式示意图二;Figure 6 is a second schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的信息格式示意图三;FIG. 7 is a third schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of this application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的信息格式示意图四;FIG. 8 is a fourth schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例提供的信息格式示意图五;Figure 9 is a fifth schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的信息格式示意图六;Figure 10 is a sixth schematic diagram of an information format provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例提供的数据复制传输的指示方法流程示意图三;FIG. 11 is a third flowchart of a method for indicating data copy transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例提供的数据复制传输的指示方法流程示意图四;FIG. 12 is a fourth flowchart of a method for indicating data copy transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本发明实施例提供的一种网络设备组成结构示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the composition structure of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备组成结构示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图15为本发明实施例提供的一种通信设备组成结构示意图;15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present invention;
图16是本申请实施例提供的一种芯片的示意性框图;FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a chip provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统架构的示意性图二。FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram 2 of a communication system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
为了能够更加详尽地了解本发明实施例的特点与技术内容,下面结合附图对本发明实施例的实现进行详细阐述,所附附图仅供参考说明之用,并非用来限定本发明实施例。In order to understand the features and technical contents of the embodiments of the present invention in more detail, the following describes the implementation of the embodiments of the present invention in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. The accompanying drawings are for reference only and are not intended to limit the embodiments of the present invention.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are part of the embodiments of the present application, but not all the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in the present application, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative work fall within the protection scope of the present application.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)通信系统或5G系统等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: Global System of Mobile Communication (GSM) system, Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system, and Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication system or 5G system, etc.
示例性的,本申请实施例应用的通信系统100可以如图1-1所示。该通信系统100可以包括网络设备110,网络设备110可以是与终端设备120(或称为通信终端、终端)通信的设备。网络设备110可以为特定的地理区域提供通信覆盖,并且可以与位于该覆盖区域内的终端设备进行通信。可选地,该网络设备110可以是GSM系统或CDMA系统中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是WCDMA系统中的基站(NodeB,NB),还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)中的无线控制器,或者该网络设备可以为移动交换中心、中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备、集线器、交换机、网桥、路由器、5G网络中的网络侧设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中的网络设备等。Exemplarily, the communication system 100 applied in the embodiment of the present application may be as shown in FIG. 1-1. The communication system 100 may include a network device 110, and the network device 110 may be a device that communicates with a terminal device 120 (or referred to as a communication terminal, terminal). The network device 110 can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area, and can communicate with terminal devices located within the coverage area. Optionally, the network device 110 may be a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in a GSM system or a CDMA system, a base station (NodeB, NB) in a WCDMA system, or an evolved base station in an LTE system (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB), or a wireless controller in the Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN), or the network equipment can be a mobile switching center, a relay station, an access point, an in-vehicle device, Wearable devices, hubs, switches, bridges, routers, network-side devices in 5G networks or network devices in future public land mobile networks (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN), etc.
该通信系统100还包括位于网络设备110覆盖范围内的至少一个终端设备120。作为在此使用的“终端设备”包括但不限于经由有线线路连接,如经由公共交换电话网络(Public Switched Telephone Networks,PSTN)、数字用户线路(Digital Subscriber Line,DSL)、数字电缆、直接电缆连接;和/或另一数据连接/网络;和/或经由无线接口,如,针对蜂窝网络、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Network,WLAN)、诸如DVB-H网络的数字电视网络、卫星网络、AM-FM广播发送器;和/或另一终端设备的被设置成接收/发送通信信号的装置;和/或物联网(Internet of Things,IoT)设备。被设置成通过无线接口通信的终端设备可以被称为“无线通信终端”、“无线终端”或“移动终端”。移动终端的示例包括但不限于卫星或蜂窝电话;可以组合蜂窝无线电电话与数据处理、传真以及数据通信能力的个人通信系统(Personal Communications System,PCS)终端;可以包括无线电电话、寻呼机、因特网/内联网接入、Web浏览器、记事簿、日历以及/或全球定位系统(Global Positioning System,GPS)接收器的PDA;以及常规膝上型和/或掌上型接收器或包括无线电电话收发器的其它电子装置。终端设备可以指接入终端、用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设 备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的PLMN中的终端设备等。The communication system 100 also includes at least one terminal device 120 within the coverage of the network device 110. As used herein, "terminal equipment" includes, but is not limited to, connections via wired lines, such as via Public Switched Telephone Networks (PSTN), Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL), digital cables, and direct cable connections ; And/or another data connection/network; and/or via wireless interfaces, such as for cellular networks, wireless local area networks (Wireless Local Area Network, WLAN), digital TV networks such as DVB-H networks, satellite networks, AM- FM broadcast transmitter; and/or another terminal device configured to receive/transmit communication signals; and/or Internet of Things (IoT) equipment. A terminal device set to communicate through a wireless interface may be referred to as a "wireless communication terminal", "wireless terminal", or "mobile terminal". Examples of mobile terminals include, but are not limited to, satellite or cellular telephones; Personal Communication Systems (PCS) terminals that can combine cellular radiotelephones with data processing, facsimile, and data communication capabilities; may include radiotelephones, pagers, Internet/internal PDA with networked access, web browser, notepad, calendar, and/or Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver; and conventional laptop and/or palm-type receivers or others including radiotelephone transceivers Electronic device. Terminal equipment can refer to access terminals, user equipment (UE), user units, user stations, mobile stations, mobile stations, remote stations, remote terminals, mobile equipment, user terminals, terminals, wireless communication equipment, user agents, or User device. Access terminals can be cellular phones, cordless phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) stations, personal digital processing (Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in 5G networks, or terminal devices in PLMNs that will evolve in the future, etc.
可选地,终端设备120之间可以进行终端直连(Device to Device,D2D)通信。Optionally, direct terminal connection (Device to Device, D2D) communication may be performed between the terminal devices 120.
可选地,5G系统或5G网络还可以称为新无线(New Radio,NR)系统或NR网络。Optionally, the 5G system or 5G network may also be referred to as a New Radio (NR) system or NR network.
图1-1示例性地示出了一个网络设备和两个终端设备,可选地,该通信系统100可以包括多个网络设备并且每个网络设备的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Figure 1-1 exemplarily shows one network device and two terminal devices. Optionally, the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices and the coverage of each network device may include other numbers of terminal devices. The embodiment of the application does not limit this.
可选地,该通信系统100还可以包括网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the communication system 100 may further include other network entities such as a network controller, a mobility management entity, etc. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
应理解,本申请实施例中网络/系统中具有通信功能的设备可称为通信设备。以图1-1示出的通信系统100为例,通信设备可包括具有通信功能的网络设备110和终端设备120,网络设备110和终端设备120可以为上文所述的具体设备,此处不再赘述;通信设备还可包括通信系统100中的其他设备,例如网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例中对此不做限定。It should be understood that the devices with communication functions in the network/system in the embodiments of the present application may be referred to as communication devices. Taking the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1-1 as an example, the communication device may include a network device 110 with communication functions and a terminal device 120. The network device 110 and the terminal device 120 may be the specific devices described above. Further details; the communication device may also include other devices in the communication system 100, such as other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
另外,关于现有技术中,数据复制在PDCP层进行,相同的PDCP PDU分别映射到不同的RLC Entity。MAC需要将不同RLC实体(RLC entity)的复制数据传输到不同的载波,此时对应的RLC实体数目可以为至少一个:1,2,3,4等。In addition, in the prior art, data replication is performed at the PDCP layer, and the same PDCP PDU is mapped to different RLC Entity. The MAC needs to transmit replicated data of different RLC entities (RLC entities) to different carriers. At this time, the number of corresponding RLC entities can be at least one: 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.
对于CA场景,支持数据复制传输(data duplication)的方案利用PDCP的复制数据功能,使复制的PDCP PDU分别传输到两个RLC实体(两个不同的逻辑信道),并最终保证复制的PDCP PDU能够在不同物理层聚合载波上传输,从而达到频率分集增益以提高数据传输可靠性。如图1-2中的DRB 1和DRB 3。:For the CA scenario, the solution that supports data duplication utilizes the data duplication function of PDCP, so that the duplicate PDCP PDU is transmitted to two RLC entities (two different logical channels), and finally the duplicate PDCP PDU can be guaranteed It is transmitted on aggregated carriers of different physical layers to achieve frequency diversity gain to improve data transmission reliability. DRB 1 and DRB 3 in Figure 1-2. :
对于DC场景,支持数据复制传输(data duplication)的方案利用PDCP的复制数据功能,使复制的PDCP PDU分别传输到两个RLC实体,两个RLC实体分别对应不同的MAC实体。如图1-2所示的DRB2。For the DC scenario, the solution supporting data duplication utilizes the data duplication function of PDCP, so that the copied PDCP PDU is transmitted to two RLC entities respectively, and the two RLC entities respectively correspond to different MAC entities. DRB2 as shown in Figure 1-2.
对于数据复制传输而言,上行的PDCP数据复制功能是可以基于DRB来进行配置的,也就是以DRB粒度,配置复制数据传输,控制复制数据传输激活还是去激活。For data replication and transmission, the uplink PDCP data replication function can be configured based on DRB, that is, with DRB granularity, the replication data transmission is configured to control whether the replication data transmission is activated or deactivated.
在现有的协议(NR R15)中,对于配置了复制数据传输功能的数据无线承载,网络可以通过MAC CE动态的激活(activate)或者去激活(deactivate)某一个数据无线承载的数据复制传输功能。比如图1-3中,MAC CE包含一个8bit的Bitmap,bitmap中的比特位分别对应不同的DRB,通过比特位中的值的不同来指示对应的DRB的数据复制数据的激活或者去激活。现有技术只能支持leg数最多为2,而这与R16多于两个leg的需求是不匹配的。因此,对于需要考虑相应的解决方案,以支持R16由于leg数增多所引入的新问题,比如如何配置多于2个leg,以及在配置了多于两个leg的情况下,如何指示配置的哪个leg传输复制数据(激活),配置的哪个leg不传输复制数据(去激活),是需要解决的问题。In the existing protocol (NR R15), for the data radio bearer configured with the copy data transmission function, the network can dynamically activate or deactivate the data copy transmission function of a certain data radio bearer through the MAC CE . For example, in Figure 1-3, the MAC CE contains an 8-bit Bitmap. The bits in the bitmap correspond to different DRBs. The different values in the bits indicate the activation or deactivation of the corresponding DRB data copy data. The existing technology can only support a maximum of 2 legs, which does not match the requirement of R16 for more than two legs. Therefore, it is necessary to consider corresponding solutions to support the new problems introduced by R16 due to the increase in the number of legs, such as how to configure more than two legs, and how to indicate which one is configured when more than two legs are configured The leg transmits the copied data (activation), and which leg configured does not transmit the copied data (deactivation) is a problem that needs to be solved.
应理解,本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the terms "system" and "network" are often used interchangeably herein. The term "and/or" in this article is just an association relationship that describes an associated object, which means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, exist alone B these three cases. In addition, the character “/” in this article generally indicates that the related objects before and after it are in an “or” relationship.
为了能够更加详尽地了解本发明实施例的特点与技术内容,下面结合附图对本发明实施例的实现进行详细阐述,所附附图仅供参考说明之用,并非用来限定本发明实施例。In order to understand the features and technical contents of the embodiments of the present invention in more detail, the following describes the implementation of the embodiments of the present invention in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. The accompanying drawings are for reference only and are not intended to limit the embodiments of the present invention.
实施例一、Example one
本发明实施例提供了一种数据复制传输的指示方法,应用于网络设备,如图2所示,包括:The embodiment of the present invention provides an instruction method for data replication transmission, which is applied to a network device, as shown in FIG. 2, including:
步骤201:向终端设备发送第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息;Step 201: Send first information to the terminal device; where the first information is used to characterize the binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, The first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission;
其中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the first information includes at least one of the following:
逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between logical channels;
DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB;
载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between the carrier and the carried logical channel;
载波之间的绑定关系。The binding relationship between carriers.
其中,所述对象为承载、RLC(Radio Link Control,无线链路层控制协议)实体、逻辑信道、载波中之一。Wherein, the object is one of a bearer, an RLC (Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol) entity, a logical channel, and a carrier.
上述对象使用使用相同的复制传输状态指的是,第一信息所指示的对象,都使用复制传输状态、或 者,都不使用复制传输状态。The use of the same copy transmission state for the above objects means that the objects indicated by the first information all use the copy transmission state, or they do not use the copy transmission state.
本实施例中所述使用复制传输模式,具体的可以为逻辑信道处于激活状态,也就是复制传输处于激活状态;不使用复制传输模式,可以为逻辑信道为去激活状态,即不进行复制传输的状态。In this embodiment, the use of the copy transmission mode may specifically be that the logical channel is in the active state, that is, the copy transmission is in the active state; if the copy transmission mode is not used, the logical channel may be in the deactivated state, that is, the copy transmission is not performed. status.
下面针对前述几种绑定关系的处理方式分别进行说明:The following describes the processing methods of the aforementioned binding relationships:
所述逻辑信道之间的绑定关系包括以下之一:The binding relationship between the logical channels includes one of the following:
至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息;Binding relationship information of at least two logical channels;
至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息;First type mode information of at least two logical channels;
至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息。The second type mode information of at least two logical channels.
其中,所述逻辑信道为配置的可以用来传输分组数据汇聚协议(PDCP,Packet Data Convergence Protocol))协议数据单元(PDU,Protocol Data Unit)和/或其复制数据的逻辑信道。The logical channel is a configured logical channel that can be used to transmit a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP, Packet Data Convergence Protocol)) protocol data unit (PDU, Protocol Data Unit) and/or its replicated data.
还需要指出的是,所述逻辑信道可以为终端设备的任意一个逻辑信道。与所述逻辑信道配对的逻辑信道可以属于不同的小区组(CG,Cell Group),也可以属于同一CG。和/或,配对的逻辑信道可以对应不同的承载,也可以对应相同的承载。It should also be pointed out that the logical channel may be any logical channel of the terminal device. The logical channels paired with the logical channels may belong to different cell groups (CG, Cell Group), or may belong to the same CG. And/or, the paired logical channels may correspond to different bearers or the same bearer.
进一步地,当配对的逻辑信道对应相同的承载,则逻辑信道为leg。Further, when the paired logical channels correspond to the same bearer, the logical channel is leg.
其中,关于legs的说明,数据复制传输时,一个PDCP实体的数据包可以由对应的多个RLC实体或逻辑信道进行传输,其中一个对应的RLC实体或逻辑信道即可成为一个leg。在本申请实施例中,可以假定legs数为n,n为大于等于1的整数。Among them, in the description of legs, when data is copied and transmitted, a data packet of a PDCP entity can be transmitted by multiple RLC entities or logical channels, and one of the corresponding RLC entities or logical channels can become a leg. In the embodiment of the present application, it can be assumed that the number of legs is n, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
具体的,所述至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息所指示的至少两个逻辑信道具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;具体的,被绑定的逻辑信道和与其配对逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same replication transmission or non-replication transmission status; specifically, the bound logical channel and the logical channel paired with it The data replication transmission activation/deactivation status is the same, that is, the replication data is transmitted or the replication data is not transmitted.
或者,or,
所述至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息,包括至少一个模式;其中,同一模式内对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同模式之间所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同。比如,至少一个模式可以有两个模式,比如第一模式以及第二模式,即mode 1和mode 2。其中,同种模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。不同模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态可以相同也可以不同。The first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes The status of the transmission with or without copying is the same or different. For example, at least one mode may have two modes, such as a first mode and a second mode, namely mode 1 and mode 2. Among them, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted. The data replication transmission activation/deactivation states of the logical channels of different modes may be the same or different.
或者or
所述至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息,包括至少一个全模式以及选择模式;其中,所述同一全模式中对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同的全模式之间对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;所述选择模式对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态分别进行指示。其中,全模式即full mode,选择模式select mode。所述full mode代表逻辑信道与其他逻辑信道配对成组,该组逻辑信道采用公共bit指示是否传输传输复制数据,select mode代表逻辑信道无配对组,该逻辑信道需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。The second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying. The use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated. Among them, the full mode is full mode, and the selection mode is select mode. The full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels into a group, and the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents the logical channel unpaired group, and the logical channel requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data .
需要指出的是,每一个全模式之间的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态可以相同也可以不同,比如,第一全模式与第二全模式的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态不同;第一全模式与第三全模式的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态相同。It should be pointed out that the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel between each full mode can be the same or different, for example, the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel of the first full mode and the second full mode Different; the first full mode and the third full mode have the same logical channel with or without copying transmission status.
还需要说明的是,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息,指的是,能通过第一信息中所指示的相关信息,使得终端设备确定对象之间的绑定信息。比如,当第一信息指示了逻辑信道1为绑定的逻辑信道,或者逻辑信道1为全模式的信道,逻辑信道3、4同样指示了为全模式的逻辑信道;也就是说,终端设备可以基于针对逻辑信道1、3、4的第一信息,确定逻辑信道1、3、4为具备绑定关系。其他粒度也是同样的处理方式,比如,针对DRB或者载波,可以同样为其设置绑定标识,另外的SRB和/或DRB也设置有相应的绑定标识的时候,数据资源承载(DRB,Data Resource Bearer)与信令资源承载(SRB,Signal Resource Bearer)和/或DRB之间就具备绑定关系;这里不再一一进行赘述。It should also be noted that the first information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission, which means that the terminal device can determine the binding information between objects through the related information indicated in the first information. For example, when the first information indicates that logical channel 1 is a bound logical channel, or logical channel 1 is a full-mode channel, logical channels 3 and 4 also indicate a full-mode logical channel; that is, the terminal device can Based on the first information for the logical channels 1, 3, and 4, it is determined that the logical channels 1, 3, and 4 have a binding relationship. Other granularities are handled in the same way. For example, for DRB or carrier, you can also set the binding identifier for it. When other SRB and/or DRB are also set with the corresponding binding identifier, data resource bearer (DRB, Data Resource Bearer) and Signal Resource Bearer (SRB, Signal Resource Bearer) and/or DRB have a binding relationship; they will not be repeated here.
采用上述方式,在灵活有效的支持数据复制的指示的情况下,减少指示信息中需要的bit位,用尽可能简短/简单的bit指示,尽可能地减少多个bit指示引入带来的空口信令开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度。Using the above method, in the case of flexible and effective support for data replication instructions, reduce the number of bits required in the instruction information, use the shortest/simple bit instructions as possible, and minimize the air interface information caused by the introduction of multiple bit instructions. Make the overhead, reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and the base station.
第一种处理方式、The first approach,
本处理方式的具体流程,参见图3:For the specific process of this processing method, see Figure 3:
网络侧,具体可以为基站确定是否使用数据复制传输方式以及数据复制传输方式的相关配置信息。第一信息为强制mandatory配置或者可选optional配置。The network side can specifically determine whether to use the data replication transmission mode and the related configuration information of the data replication transmission mode for the base station. The first information is mandatory configuration or optional optional configuration.
网络侧,可以为基站,确定使用的数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息以及第一信息;第一信息用于指示逻辑信道之间的绑定关系。具体的,被绑定的逻辑信道和与其配对 逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The network side may be the base station, determine the data replication transmission mode used, and notify the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information; the first information is used to indicate the binding relationship between the logical channels. Specifically, the bound logical channel has the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status as the paired logical channel, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
进一步地,本处理方式中包括子方案1:Further, this processing method includes sub-scheme 1:
所述向终端设备发送第一信息,包括:The sending the first information to the terminal device includes:
确定具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道;在向终端设备发送与所述至少两个逻辑信道对应的配置消息,所述配置信息用于指示所述第一信息;Determining that there are at least two logical channels with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission; sending configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the first information;
其中,所述配置信息包括所述逻辑信道的绑定信息;当所述配置信息中指示的绑定信息为真时,表征所述逻辑信道为具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道中之一。Wherein, the configuration information includes the binding information of the logical channel; when the binding information indicated in the configuration information is true, it indicates that the logical channel is at least with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission. One of two logical channels.
也就是说,网络侧基站发送给终端设备的逻辑信道对应的配置消息中,指示绑定信息。若绑定指示信息为真(Ture),则代表逻辑信道绑定。进一步地,终端设备可以将所有绑定指示信息为Ture的逻辑信道设置为一组。通过指示其中一个逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活),即指示该组的所有逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。That is, the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel sent by the network side base station to the terminal device indicates the binding information. If the binding indication information is True, it represents logical channel binding. Further, the terminal device may set all logical channels whose binding indication information is True as a group. By indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
本子方案中,网络侧可以通过媒体访问控制(MAC,Media Access Control)控制元素(CE,Control Element)、无线资源控制(RRC,Radio Resource Control)消息、下行控制信息(DCI,DownLink Control Information)中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下信息至少之一:逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识。In this sub-scheme, the network side can use the media access control (MAC, Media Access Control) control element (CE, Control Element), radio resource control (RRC, Radio Resource Control) message, and downlink control information (DCI, DownLink Control Information). One of the methods instructs the terminal equipment to use replication transmission or non-use replication transmission status of the logical channel; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following information: logical channel identifier, and cell corresponding to the logical channel Group CG identification.
另一种发送指示的方式可以为:所述配置消息中还包括:逻辑信道所绑定的组标识;所述方法还包括:通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所绑定的组标识、逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识至少之一。Another way of sending instructions may be: the configuration message further includes: the group identifier bound to the logical channel; the method further includes: indicating the logical channel to the terminal device through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI Use copy transmission or not use copy transmission state; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the group identifier bound to the logical channel, the logical channel identifier, and the cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel is at least One.
也就是说,在网络侧发送给终端设备的配置消息中,同时指示绑定的组标识。而后在指示更新的消息,如在MAC CE中携带绑定的组标识、逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识至少之一。In other words, the configuration message sent to the terminal device from the network side also indicates the bound group identifier. Then the message indicating the update, such as the MAC CE, carries at least one of the bound group identifier, logical channel identifier, and cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
例如,参见图4,配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5绑定,则将DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5的绑定指示信息为Ture,boundFlag=1。For example, referring to Figure 4, if the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 will be bound with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3. The information is Ture, boundFlag=1.
新信息元素(IE)boundFlag,格式可以如下boundFlag-r16BOOLEAN OPTIONAL,--Need R。具体的:The new information element (IE) boundFlag, the format can be as follows: boundFlag-r16BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, --Need R. specific:
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000002
本处理方式中还可以包括子方案2:This processing method can also include sub-scheme 2:
所述向终端设备发送第一信息,包括:The sending the first information to the terminal device includes:
确定具备相同激活或去激活状态的至少两个逻辑信道;Determine at least two logical channels with the same activation or deactivation status;
向终端设备发送所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一逻辑信道对应的配置信息;所述配置信息中包含有与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道的标识,和/或,与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。Send configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels to the terminal device; the configuration information contains the identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel, and/or The CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
也就是,在逻辑信道对应的配置消息中,指示与之绑定的逻辑信道标识,和/或,之绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。绑定的逻辑信道为一组,指示其中一个逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活),即指示该组的所有逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。That is, the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel indicates the identifier of the logical channel bound to it, and/or the CG identifier to which the bound logical channel belongs. The bound logical channels are a group, indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
所述方法还包括:通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下至少之一:逻辑信道、逻辑信道所所属的小区组CG标识。The method further includes: indicating to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the following At least one: the logical channel and the CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
例如,配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5绑定,则可以在配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1时,携带boundLogicalChannels IE和CG-Idendity.For example, if the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 can be configured with boundLogicalChannels IE and CG-Idendity.
例如,新增IE,boundLogicalChannel,用于配置该逻辑信道对应的绑定的逻辑信道标识,和绑定的逻辑信道标识所属的cell group标识。具体的通过IE来指示绑定逻辑信道,可以包括有逻辑信道标识(LogicalChannelIdentity)以及小区组标识(CG-identity),比如可以包括:“boundLogicalChannelList-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxLC-ID-1))OF boundLogicalChannel OPTIONAL,--Need R boundLogicalChannel::=SEQUENCE{For example, a new IE, boundLogicalChannel, is used to configure the bound logical channel identifier corresponding to the logical channel and the cell group identifier to which the bound logical channel identifier belongs. Specifically, the IE is used to indicate the bound logical channel, which can include logical channel identification (LogicalChannelIdentity) and cell group identification (CG-identity), for example: "boundLogicalChannelList-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxLC-ID-1)) )OF boundLogicalChannel OPTIONAL,--Need R boundLogicalChannel::=SEQUENCE{
LogicalChannelIdentity LogicalChannelIdentity,OPTIONAL,--Need RLogicalChannelIdentityLogicalChannelIdentity,OPTIONAL,--Need R
CG-identity CellGroupId OPTIONAL,--Need R”CG-identity CellGroupId OPTIONAL,--Need R"
用于标识绑定的逻辑信道列表以及逻辑信道的标识、以及小区组标识。Used to identify the bound logical channel list, logical channel identification, and cell group identification.
具体如下:details as follows:
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000004
所述第一信息由RRC重配置消息携带。也就是说,基站通过RRC重配置消息通知所有的数据复制传输配置信息以及第一信息。The first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
可选的,基站在通过RRC reconfiguration IE中的LogicalChannelConfig IE中新增IE,用于通知第一信息。重用RRC重配消息的好处在于尽可能的重用现有的消息和过程,减少终端设备复杂度。具体IE格式参见前述说明,这里不再描述。Optionally, the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information. The advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment. For the specific IE format, please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be described here.
针对前述两种子方案的后续处理,仍参见图3,终端设备接收来自基站(即网络侧)的RRC消息,根据RRC消息中的第一信息配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认配对信息和/或配对的逻辑信信道。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。其中,初始复制数据传输方式可以在网络侧发来的配置信息中包含,当然,也可以为终端设备默认的初始复制数据传输方式,可以为激活或去激活,即使用复制传输的方式或不使用复制传输的方式。进一步的,在初始传输方式配置中,可以配置激活或去激活使用的RLC实体。For the subsequent processing of the foregoing two sub-schemes, referring to Figure 3, the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station (ie, the network side), configures the RLC entity according to the first information in the RRC message, and confirms the pairing information and/or according to the first information Paired logical channel. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode. Among them, the initial copy data transmission method can be included in the configuration information sent from the network side. Of course, it can also be the default initial copy data transmission method of the terminal device. It can be activated or deactivated, that is, use the copy transmission method or not. Copy the transmission method. Further, in the initial transmission mode configuration, the RLC entity used for activation or deactivation can be configured.
当基站判断需要进行数据复制方式的变更时,如数据复制传输激活/去激活时,基站通过专用信息指示终端设备变更复制数据传输的状态为激活还是去激活。其中,专用信息可以为MAC CE,RRC,DCI信令。When the base station determines that it is necessary to change the data replication mode, such as when the data replication transmission is activated/deactivated, the base station instructs the terminal device to change the status of the replication data transmission to activation or deactivation through dedicated information. Among them, the dedicated information can be MAC CE, RRC, or DCI signaling.
终端设备接收来自基站的数据复制方式的变更指示消息,如通过MAC CE指示终端设备进行相应承载的数据复制传输激活/去激活时,终端设备按照MAC CE中相应的bit信息确定进行激活或者去激活操作,后续按照更新的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态进行数据传输。The terminal device receives a data copy mode change indication message from the base station. For example, when the terminal device is instructed to activate/deactivate the corresponding bearer data copy transmission through the MAC CE, the terminal device determines the activation or deactivation according to the corresponding bit information in the MAC CE Operation, subsequent data transmission is performed according to the updated data copy transmission activation/deactivation status.
MAC CE,RRC,DCI的格式可以如图5、6所示,以MAC CE为例进行说明,可以在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。其中,A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。LogicalchannelIdetity:代表指示的逻辑信道标识。CG-ID:代表指示的逻辑信道归属的Cell Group标识。The formats of MAC CE, RRC, and DCI can be shown in Figures 5 and 6, taking MAC CE as an example. A new LCID can be introduced in the MAC CE subheader to indicate replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling New format. Among them, A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits copy data. LogicalchannelIdetity: Represents the indicated logical channel identifier. CG-ID: Represents the cell group identifier to which the indicated logical channel belongs.
子方案3:Sub-program 3:
通过至少一种模式指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输的状态,也就是激活或去激活的状态;本方案以两种模式为例进行说明,分别为第一模式以及第二模式,具体的:At least one mode is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel, that is, the state of activation or deactivation; this solution uses two modes as examples for illustration, namely the first mode and the second mode, specific:
通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。Through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI to indicate to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode, and/or, the status of using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode or Do not use copy transfer status.
具体的,所述第一信息可以为逻辑信道的模式种类信息,包括mode 1,mode 2。其中,同种模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the first information may be mode type information of a logical channel, including mode 1, mode 2. Among them, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
具体的,配置为不同模式的,使用的指示bit位不同。Specifically, when the configuration is in different modes, the indication bits used are different.
例如:配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5的mode为1,其他逻辑信道mode为2,则可以在配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1时,携带BoundMode,根据该IE确定是哪个mode.For example: configure the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 and LC4 of DRB2, the mode of LC5 of DRB3 is 1, and the mode of other logical channels is 2, you can configure the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 with BoundMode, according to The IE determines which mode.
RRC配置例如IE BoundMode,用于配置该逻辑信道绑定的mode信息,可以为“BoundMode-r16ENUMERATED{1,2,3,4}OPTIONAL,--Need R”用于表示绑定模式。具体参见以下:The RRC configuration, such as IE BoundMode, is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel bonding, and it can be "BoundMode-r16ENUMERATED{1,2,3,4}OPTIONAL,--Need R" to indicate the bonding mode. See the following for details:
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000006
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过不同行来指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,用于指示第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。需要理解的是,第一行与第二行可以相邻也可以不相邻,当然第一行与第二行可以为从上至下,也可以从下至上。In one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, different rows are used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the first mode uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status, and/or is used to indicate the second mode corresponds to The status of the logical channel using copy transmission or not using copy transmission. It should be understood that the first row and the second row may or may not be adjacent. Of course, the first row and the second row may be from top to bottom, or from bottom to top.
比如,参见图7,第一行代表mode1的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据,第二行代表mode2的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。For example, referring to Fig. 7, the first row represents whether the logical channel of mode 1 transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of mode 2 transmits copy data.
子方案4:Sub-program 4:
通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,选择模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。Use one of MAC CE, RRC message, or DCI to indicate to the terminal device the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and/or the use of copy transmission or not using the logical channel corresponding to the selected mode Copy the transmission status.
具体的,所述第一信息可以为逻辑信道的模式信息,包括full mode,select mode。其中,full mode代表逻辑信道与其他逻辑信道配对成组,该组逻辑信道采用公共bit指示是否传输复制数据,select mode代表逻辑信道无配对组,该逻辑信道需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。Specifically, the first information may be mode information of a logical channel, including full mode and select mode. Among them, full mode represents a logical channel paired with other logical channels to form a group, the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents a logical channel unpaired group, which requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data.
若逻辑信道配置为full mode,代表配对的逻辑信道激活/去激活状态相同,或者,配对的逻辑信道均激活,或者,配对的逻辑信道均去激活。If the logical channel is configured as full mode, it means that the paired logical channels have the same activation/deactivation status, or the paired logical channels are all activated, or the paired logical channels are all deactivated.
若逻辑信道配置为select mode,代表无配对,需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。If the logical channel is configured as select mode, it means that there is no pairing, and a separate bit is needed to indicate whether to transmit copy data.
例如:根据mode信息,确定最终可以支持的RLC实体激活方式。比如,配置4个逻辑信道/RLC实体,信道0,1,2,3的mode分别为full,select,full,select,这样支持的所有RLC激活的组合有以下几种(0代表对应RLC实体激活,1代表对应RLC实体去激活,顺序为RLC实体0,RLC实体1,RLC实体2,RLC实体3):(0,0,0,0),(1,0,1,0),(1,1,1,0),(1,0,1,1),(1,1,1,1).比如,这5种组合,可以用select mode对应行中的3个bit代表的不同取值来指示。可选的,leg组合方式或者所有RLC激活的组合方式,可以由基站通知终端设备,也可以是预先定义的。For example: According to the mode information, determine the RLC entity activation mode that can be finally supported. For example, configure 4 logical channels/RLC entities, and the modes of channels 0, 1, 2 and 3 are full, select, full, and select respectively, so that all supported combinations of RLC activation are as follows (0 represents the corresponding RLC entity activation , 1 represents the deactivation of the corresponding RLC entity, the order is RLC entity 0, RLC entity 1, RLC entity 2, RLC entity 3): (0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0), (1 ,1,1,0), (1,0,1,1), (1,1,1,1). For example, for these 5 combinations, you can use the select mode corresponding to the 3 bits in the row Value to indicate. Optionally, the leg combination mode or the combination mode of all RLC activations may be notified to the terminal equipment by the base station, or may be predefined.
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过第一行中的至少一个比特指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,通过第二行中的不同比特指示选择模式所对应的至少一个逻辑信道分别对应的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。比如,参见图7、8,图7中的第一行代表full mode的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据,第二行代表select mode的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;或者,如图8所示,在信息中A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;LogicalchannelIdetity:代表指示的逻辑信道标识;CG-ID:代表指示的逻辑信道归属的Cell Group标识;Index:代表对应指示的哪个可用于传输复制数据的逻辑信道组合。In one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, at least one bit in the first row is used to indicate the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and/or, through the second row The different bits in indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission respectively corresponding to at least one logical channel corresponding to the selection mode. For example, referring to Figures 7 and 8, the first row in Figure 7 represents whether the logical channel of full mode transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of select mode transmits copy data; or, as shown in Figure 8, in the information Middle A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits replicated data; LogicalchannelIdetity: Represents the indicated logical channel identifier; CG-ID: Represents the Cell Group ID to which the indicated logical channel belongs; Index: Represents which of the corresponding indications can be used to transmit replicated data Logical channel combination.
第二种处理方式、The second processing method,
所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的DRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态;The DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB;
或者,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的SRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态。Alternatively, the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
具体的,被绑定的SRB和/或DRB和与其配对DRB和/或SRB的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the bound SRB and/or DRB and its paired DRB and/or SRB is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
基于上述处理方式能够灵活有效的支持data duplication的指示的情况下,减少指示信息中需要的bit位,用尽可能简短/简单的bit指示,尽可能地减少多个bit指示引入带来的空口信令开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度。Based on the above processing method, it can flexibly and effectively support data duplication instructions, reduce the bits required in the instruction information, use the shortest/simple bit instructions, and reduce the air interface information caused by the introduction of multiple bit instructions as much as possible Make the overhead, reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and the base station.
具体步骤如下:Specific steps are as follows:
网络侧,比如基站,确定使用数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息,以及第一信息,用于指示第一信息为承载(DRB和/或SRB)之间的绑定关系。具体的,被绑定的承载和与其配对承载的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The network side, such as the base station, determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and informs the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information used to indicate that the first information is the binding between bearers (DRB and/or SRB) relationship. Specifically, the bound bearer is in the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation state as its paired bearer, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
例如,参见图4,配置DRB1和DRB2绑定,代表若指示DRB的使用复制数据传输,则同时DRB2也采用相同的复制数据传输。For example, referring to Fig. 4, configuring the binding of DRB1 and DRB2 means that if the use of DRB is instructed to replicate data transmission, DRB2 also uses the same replicated data transmission.
RRC IE见下:例如在RRC reconfiguration IE中的RadioBearerConfig IE中新增IE,boundDRBs,用于配置与此承载绑定的承载的标识。比如,““boundSRBs-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxDRB-1))OF SRB-Identity OPTIONAL,--Need R”和/或“boundDRBs-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxDRB-1))OF DRB-Identity OPTIONAL,--Need R”分别用于表示绑定的DRB的信息。具体的,比如:The RRC IE is as follows: for example, in the RadioBearerConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, a newly added IE, boundDRBs, is used to configure the identity of the bearer bound to this bearer. For example, ""boundSRBs-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxDRB-1))OF SRB-Identity OPTIONAL,--Need R" and/or "boundDRBs-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxDRB-1))OFDRB- Identity OPTIONAL, --Need R" are used to indicate the information of the bound DRB. Specifically, such as:
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000008
基站通过RRC重配置消息通知所有的数据复制传输配置信息以及第一信息。The base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
可选的,基站在通过RRC reconfiguration IE中的LogicalChannelConfig IE中新增IE,用于通知第一信息。重用RRC重配消息的好处在于尽可能的重用现有的消息和过程,减少终端设备复杂度。具体IE格式参见前述说明,不再赘述。Optionally, the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information. The advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment. For the specific IE format, please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated.
终端设备接收来自基站的RRC消息,配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认配对信息和配对的承载信息。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。The terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the pairing information and the paired bearer information according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;Instruct the terminal device to change the data copy transmission instruction through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有DRB或SRB的标识,或者,携带有DRB或SRB的标识、以及DRB或SRB对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
MAC CE可以为以下的格式:The MAC CE can be in the following format:
可选的,在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。比如,参见图9,其中A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;DRB-identity:代表指示的DRB标识。Optionally, in the MAC CE subheader, a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling. For example, see Figure 9, where A/D: represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data; DRB-identity: represents the indicated DRB identity.
第三种处理方式、The third processing method,
所述载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系,用于通过指示载波的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,确定承载的逻辑信道的是否传输复制数据。The binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel transmits replicated data by indicating whether the carrier uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status.
也就是说,第一信息为载波和承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定信息。具体的,可以使用基于载波的激活/去激活的方式,指示对应承载的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。这里需要说明的是,通过载波指示的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据时,逻辑信道对应的承载可以是或者不是同一个承载。That is, the first information is the binding information between the carrier and the carried logical channel. Specifically, a carrier-based activation/deactivation method can be used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the bearer transmits duplicate data. It should be noted here that when the logical channel indicated by the carrier is used to transmit replicated data, the bearer corresponding to the logical channel may or may not be the same bearer.
具体步骤如下:Specific steps are as follows:
基站确定使用数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息,以及第一信息,用于指示第一信息为载波和逻辑信道(LC)之间的绑定关系。具体的,载波和与逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The base station determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information, which is used to indicate that the first information is the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel (LC). Specifically, the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
例如,参见图4,DRB1的LC1和DRB2的LC1通过载波1传输,指示载波是否使用复制数据传输,代表,DRB1的LC1和DRB2的LC1是否采用复制数据传输。根据IE allowedServingCells,确定载波和与逻辑信道的绑定关系For example, referring to Fig. 4, LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 are transmitted through carrier 1, indicating whether the carrier uses replicated data transmission, representing whether LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 use replicated data transmission. According to IE allowedServingCells, determine the carrier and the binding relationship with the logical channel
终端设备接收来自基站的RRC消息,配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认逻辑信道和载波的关系信息。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。The terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the logical channel and the carrier according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;Instruct the terminal device to change the data copy transmission instruction through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。比如,参见图10,A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;ServCellIndex:代表指示的serving cell(载波)标识;CG-ID:代表指示的serving cell(载波)所属的cell group标识。In the MAC CE subheader, a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling. For example, referring to Figure 10, A/D: represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data; ServCellIndex: represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) identifier; CG-ID: represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) belongs to the cell group identifier.
第四种处理方式、The fourth treatment method,
所述载波之间的绑定关系,用于指示具备绑定关系的至少两个载波具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers with the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or no copy transmission status.
也就是说,第一信息为载波和载波之间的绑定信息。具体的,可以使用指示载波和与其配对的载波的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。In other words, the first information is the carrier and the binding information between the carriers. Specifically, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the indicated carrier and the carrier paired with the carrier can be used to be the same, that is, both the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
具体步骤如下:Specific steps are as follows:
基站确定使用数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息,以及第一信息,用于指示第一信息为载波和载波之间的绑定关系。具体的,载波和与载波的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。进一步的,根据逻辑信道对应允许使用的载波信息,确定载波和逻辑信道的绑定关系。具体的,载波和与逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。或者,可以使用与第三种处理方式的结合方式,在第一信息中携带载波和载波,载波和LC的绑定关系。The base station determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information, which is used to indicate that the first information is the carrier and the binding relationship between the carriers. Specifically, the carrier and the carrier have the same data copy transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit copy data or not transmit copy data. Further, the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel is determined according to the information of the carrier corresponding to the allowed use of the logical channel. Specifically, the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data. Alternatively, a combination with the third processing method may be used, and the first information carries the carrier and the carrier, and the binding relationship between the carrier and the LC.
例如,载波1和载波2绑定,通过指示载波1是否使用复制数据传输,同时代载波2是否采用复制数据传输。相应的,使用该载波传输复制数据的逻辑信道或者RLC实体采用相同的数据数据传输方式(激活/去激活)For example, carrier 1 and carrier 2 are bound, by indicating whether carrier 1 uses replicated data transmission, and whether carrier 2 of the same generation uses replicated data transmission. Correspondingly, the logical channel or RLC entity that uses the carrier to transmit the copied data adopts the same data data transmission method (activation/deactivation)
可选的,基站在通过RRC reconfiguration IE中的CellGroupConfig IE中新增IE,boundServingCells, 用于指示与此载波绑定的载波。比如,boundServingCells-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxNrofServingCells-1))OF ServCellIndex OPTIONAL,--PDCP-CADuplication。具体如下:Optionally, the base station adds an IE, boundServingCells, to the CellGroupConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, which is used to indicate the carrier bound to this carrier. For example, boundServingCells-r16SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxNrofServingCells-1))OFServCellIndexOPTIONAL,--PDCP-CADuplication. details as follows:
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2019072056-appb-000009
终端设备接收来自基站的RRC消息,配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认载波之间的关系信息。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。The terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the carriers according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI的格式同第三种处理方式,具体为通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。The format of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is the same as the third processing method. Specifically, one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to change the data copy transmission; one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI One carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits duplicate data.
最后,针对MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI的格式进行说明,由于现有技术只能支持leg数最多为2的数据复制传输,而这与R16多于两个leg的需求是不匹配的。并且只支持一个bit位的激活/去激活指示方式,这种方法只能实现所有的leg都传输复制数据(激活),或者所有的leg不传输复制数据(去激活,只保留主leg传输PDCP PDU原本)的指示结果。但是,一旦基站想给不同的leg分别指示不同的激活/去激活行为(传或不传),则无法进行指示。因此,本发明实施例引出新的专用信息指示方式,如引入新的MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI格式,对应每个承载的每个leg(逻辑信道)各自使用1bit指示, 用以指示该leg是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。Finally, the format of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is explained. Since the prior art can only support data replication and transmission with a maximum of 2 legs, this does not match the requirement of R16 for more than two legs. And only supports one-bit activation/deactivation indication method. This method can only realize that all legs transmit replicated data (activation), or all legs do not transmit replicated data (deactivate, and only retain the main leg to transmit PDCP PDU Original) instruction result. However, once the base station wants to indicate different activation/deactivation behaviors (transmission or non-transmission) to different legs, it cannot perform the instruction. Therefore, the embodiment of the present invention introduces new dedicated information indication methods, such as the introduction of new MAC CE, RRC messages, and DCI formats. Each leg (logical channel) corresponding to each bearer uses a 1-bit indication to indicate whether the leg is Transfer copy data (activate/deactivate).
所述新的MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI,其可选格式之一如下:One of the optional formats of the new MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is as follows:
不同的列对应不同的DRB ID、或者载波标识、或者载波所属的小区组标识,对应方式跟现有协议一致;不同的行对应某一个DRB、或者载波标识、或者载波所属的小区组标识关联的不同RLC实体;比特位中的值代表是否采用该RLC实体传输复制数据;下面以DRB来进行说明:Different columns correspond to different DRB IDs, or carrier IDs, or cell group IDs to which the carriers belong, and the corresponding methods are consistent with existing protocols; different rows correspond to a certain DRB, or carrier ID, or the cell group ID to which the carrier belongs. Different RLC entities; the value in the bit represents whether the RLC entity is used to transmit replicated data; the following is described by DRB:
行数=max{为任意一个承载配置,用于复制数据输出的RLC实体/逻辑信道数},如为DRB 0配置的RLC实体数为4,为DRB3配置的RLC实体数为8,该MAC CE的行数为8。Number of rows = max {the number of RLC entities/logical channels used to copy data output for any bearer configuration}. For example, the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 0 is 4, and the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 3 is 8, the MAC CE The number of rows is 8.
或者,行数=限制的每个承载用于传输复制数据的RLC实体/逻辑信道数,该值可以为预设值,也可以为RRC配置的值。Or, the number of rows = the number of restricted RLC entities/logical channels used for transmitting replicated data for each bearer, and this value may be a preset value or a value configured by RRC.
例如,MCG有2个DRB配置了复制数据传输功能,DRB ID分别为0、3、5、7;For example, MCG has 2 DRBs configured with copy data transmission function, and the DRB IDs are 0, 3, 5, and 7 respectively;
MAC CE的格式为4个byte,那么从第1列到第4列一次按照DRB ID升序对应这些DRB。例如,D0,D1,D2,D3列分别对应DRB ID 0、3、5、7。每一列中的不同行指示采用哪些RLC实体传输复制数据,具体的,在该例子中可以指示最多4个RLC实体传输复制数据。按照先MCG再SCG的顺序排序,在每个CG内按照逻辑信道ID升序或者降序排序。或者,按照先SCG再MCG的顺序排序,在每个CG内按照逻辑信道ID升序或者降序排序。例如对DRB0的每行,分别从上到下,分别代表RLC实体0、1、2、3。The format of MAC CE is 4 bytes, so from column 1 to column 4 corresponding to these DRBs in ascending order of DRB ID at a time. For example, columns D0, D1, D2, and D3 correspond to DRB ID 0, 3, 5, and 7, respectively. Different rows in each column indicate which RLC entities are used to transmit replicated data. Specifically, in this example, a maximum of 4 RLC entities may be used to transmit replicated data. Sort in the order of MCG first, then SCG, and sort the logical channel ID in ascending or descending order within each CG. Or, sort according to the order of SCG first and then MCG, and sort the logical channel IDs in ascending or descending order within each CG. For example, for each row of DRB0, from top to bottom, they represent RLC entities 0, 1, 2, and 3.
具体流程参见图11,当终端设备根据第一信息确定并执行数据复制传输配置按照初始模式传输之后,接收网络侧基站通过新格式的MAC CE发来的指示,终端设备根据MAC CE的指示确定每一个leg是否传输复制数据。Refer to Figure 11 for the specific process. After the terminal device determines and executes the data copy transmission configuration according to the first information and transmits according to the initial mode, it receives the instruction sent by the network side base station through the MAC CE of the new format, and the terminal device determines the data transmission according to the MAC CE instruction. Whether a leg transmits copied data.
可见,通过采用上述方案,就能够通过第一信息确定所指示的对象,所指示的对象具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输的状态,并且第一信息中能够指示逻辑信道之间的绑定关系、DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系以及载波与逻辑信道或载波之间的绑定关系;从而提供了减少指示开销的、多种维度的数据复制传输控制方式,进而减少了空口信令的开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度,增加数据复制传输的灵活控制方式。It can be seen that by adopting the above solution, the indicated object can be determined through the first information. The indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding between logical channels. The fixed relationship, the binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB, and the binding relationship between carriers and logical channels or carriers; thereby providing a multi-dimensional data replication transmission control method that reduces indication overhead, thereby reducing air interface The overhead of signaling reduces the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increases flexible control methods for data replication and transmission.
实施例二、Example two
本发明实施例提供了一种数据复制传输的指示方法,应用于终端设备,如图12所示,包括:The embodiment of the present invention provides an instruction method for data copy transmission, which is applied to a terminal device, as shown in FIG. 12, including:
步骤301:接收第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息;Step 301: Receive first information; where the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, the first information One piece of information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission;
其中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the first information includes at least one of the following:
逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between logical channels;
DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB;
载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between the carrier and the carried logical channel;
载波之间的绑定关系。The binding relationship between carriers.
其中,所述对象为承载、RLC(Radio Link Control,无线链路层控制协议)实体、逻辑信道、载波中之一。Wherein, the object is one of a bearer, an RLC (Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol) entity, a logical channel, and a carrier.
本实施例中所述使用复制传输模式,具体的可以为逻辑信道处于激活状态,也就是复制传输处于激活状态;不使用复制传输模式,可以为逻辑信道为去激活状态,即不进行复制传输的状态。In this embodiment, the use of the copy transmission mode may specifically be that the logical channel is in the active state, that is, the copy transmission is in the active state; if the copy transmission mode is not used, the logical channel may be in the deactivated state, that is, the copy transmission is not performed. status.
下面针对前述几种绑定关系的处理方式分别进行说明:The following describes the processing methods of the aforementioned binding relationships:
所述逻辑信道之间的绑定关系包括以下之一:The binding relationship between the logical channels includes one of the following:
至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息;Binding relationship information of at least two logical channels;
至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息;First type mode information of at least two logical channels;
至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息。The second type mode information of at least two logical channels.
其中,所述逻辑信道为配置的可以用来传输PDCP PDU和/或其复制数据的逻辑信道。Wherein, the logical channel is a configured logical channel that can be used to transmit PDCP PDU and/or copy data thereof.
还需要指出的是,所述逻辑信道可以为终端设备的任意一个逻辑信道。与所述逻辑信道配对的逻辑信道可以属于不同的小区组(CG,Cell Group),也可以属于同一CG。和/或,配对的逻辑信道可以对应不同的承载,也可以对应相同的承载。It should also be pointed out that the logical channel may be any logical channel of the terminal device. The logical channels paired with the logical channels may belong to different cell groups (CG, Cell Group), or may belong to the same CG. And/or, the paired logical channels may correspond to different bearers or the same bearer.
进一步地,当配对的逻辑信道对应相同的承载,则逻辑信道为leg。Further, when the paired logical channels correspond to the same bearer, the logical channel is leg.
其中,关于legs的说明,数据复制传输时,一个PDCP实体的数据包可以由对应的多个RLC实体或逻辑信道进行传输,其中一个对应的RLC实体或逻辑信道即可成为一个leg。在本申请实施例中,可以假定legs数为n,n为大于等于1的整数。Among them, in the description of legs, when data is copied and transmitted, a data packet of a PDCP entity can be transmitted by multiple RLC entities or logical channels, and one of the corresponding RLC entities or logical channels can become a leg. In the embodiment of the present application, it can be assumed that the number of legs is n, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
具体的,所述至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息所指示的至少两个逻辑信道具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;具体的,被绑定的逻辑信道和与其配对逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激 活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same replication transmission or non-replication transmission status; specifically, the bound logical channel and the logical channel paired with it The data replication transmission activation/deactivation status is the same, that is, the replication data is transmitted or not.
或者,or,
所述至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息,包括至少一个模式;其中,同一模式内对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同模式之间所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同。比如,至少一个模式可以有两个模式,比如第一模式以及第二模式,即mode 1和mode 2。其中,同种模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。不同模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态可以相同也可以不同。The first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes The status of the transmission with or without copying is the same or different. For example, at least one mode may have two modes, such as a first mode and a second mode, namely mode 1 and mode 2. Among them, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted. The data replication transmission activation/deactivation states of the logical channels of different modes may be the same or different.
或者or
所述至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息,包括至少一个全模式以及选择模式;其中,所述同一全模式中对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同的全模式之间对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;所述选择模式对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态分别进行指示。其中,全模式即full mode,选择模式select mode。所述full mode代表逻辑信道与其他逻辑信道配对成组,该组逻辑信道采用公共bit指示是否传输传输复制数据,select mode代表逻辑信道无配对组,该逻辑信道需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。The second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying. The use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated. Among them, the full mode is full mode, and the selection mode is select mode. The full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels into a group, and the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents the logical channel unpaired group, and the logical channel requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data .
需要指出的是,每一个全模式之间的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态可以相同也可以不同,比如,第一全模式与第二全模式的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态不同;第一全模式与第三全模式的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态相同。It should be pointed out that the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel between each full mode can be the same or different, for example, the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel of the first full mode and the second full mode Different; the first full mode and the third full mode have the same logical channel with or without copying transmission status.
还需要说明的是,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息,指的是,能通过第一信息中所指示的相关信息,使得终端设备确定对象之间的绑定信息。比如,当第一信息指示了逻辑信道1为绑定的逻辑信道,或者逻辑信道1为全模式的信道,逻辑信道3、4同样指示了为全模式的逻辑信道;也就是说,终端设备可以基于针对逻辑信道1、3、4的第一信息,确定逻辑信道1、3、4为具备绑定关系。其他粒度也是同样的处理方式,比如,针对DRB或者载波,可以同样为其设置绑定标识,另外的SRB和/或DRB也设置有相应的绑定标识的时候,DRB与SRB和/或DRB之间就具备绑定关系;这里不再一一进行赘述。It should also be noted that the first information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission, which means that the terminal device can determine the binding information between objects through the related information indicated in the first information. For example, when the first information indicates that logical channel 1 is a bound logical channel, or logical channel 1 is a full-mode channel, logical channels 3 and 4 also indicate a full-mode logical channel; that is, the terminal device can Based on the first information for the logical channels 1, 3, and 4, it is determined that the logical channels 1, 3, and 4 have a binding relationship. Other granularities are handled in the same way. For example, for DRB or carrier, you can also set the binding identifier for it. When other SRB and/or DRB are also set with the corresponding binding identifier, the difference between DRB and SRB and/or DRB There is a binding relationship between them; I will not repeat them here.
采用上述方式,在灵活有效的支持数据复制的指示的情况下,减少指示信息中需要的bit位,用尽可能简短/简单的bit指示,尽可能地减少多个bit指示引入带来的空口信令开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度。Using the above method, in the case of flexible and effective support for data replication instructions, reduce the number of bits required in the instruction information, use the shortest/simple bit instructions as possible, and minimize the air interface information caused by the introduction of multiple bit instructions. Make the overhead, reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and the base station.
第一种处理方式、The first approach,
本处理方式的具体流程,参见图3:For the specific process of this processing method, see Figure 3:
网络侧,具体可以为基站确定是否使用数据复制传输方式以及数据复制传输方式的相关配置信息。第一信息为强制mandatory配置或者可选optional配置。The network side can specifically determine whether to use the data replication transmission mode and the related configuration information of the data replication transmission mode for the base station. The first information is mandatory configuration or optional optional configuration.
网络侧,可以为基站,确定使用的数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息以及第一信息;第一信息用于指示逻辑信道之间的绑定关系。具体的,被绑定的逻辑信道和与其配对逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The network side may be the base station, determine the data replication transmission mode used, and notify the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information; the first information is used to indicate the binding relationship between the logical channels. Specifically, the bound logical channel is the same as the data replication transmission activation/deactivation state of its paired logical channel, that is, both transmit the copied data or not transmit the copied data.
进一步地,本处理方式中包括子方案1:Further, this processing method includes sub-scheme 1:
所述接收第一信息,包括:The receiving the first information includes:
接收与所述至少两个逻辑信道对应的配置消息,所述配置信息用于指示所述第一信息;其中,所述配置信息包括所述逻辑信道的绑定信息;当所述配置信息中指示的绑定信息为真时,表征所述逻辑信道为具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道中之一;Receiving configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels, where the configuration information is used to indicate the first information; wherein the configuration information includes the binding information of the logical channels; when the configuration information indicates When the binding information of is true, it characterizes that the logical channel is one of at least two logical channels with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
基于所述配置消息,确定至少两个逻辑信道的绑定信息,以及根据初始复制数据传输方式控制至少两个逻辑信道进行传输。Based on the configuration message, the binding information of at least two logical channels is determined, and the at least two logical channels are controlled to transmit according to the initial replication data transmission mode.
也就是说,网络侧基站发送给终端设备的逻辑信道对应的配置消息中,指示绑定信息。若绑定指示信息为真(Ture),则代表逻辑信道绑定。进一步地,终端设备可以将所有绑定指示信息为Ture的逻辑信道设置为一组。通过指示其中一个逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活),即指示该组的所有逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。That is, the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel sent by the network side base station to the terminal device indicates the binding information. If the binding indication information is True, it represents logical channel binding. Further, the terminal device may set all logical channels whose binding indication information is True as a group. By indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
本方案中,网络侧可以通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一接收网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;In this solution, the network side can receive the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission state of the logical channel indicated by the network side through one of the MAC control elements CE, RRC message, and DCI;
其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下信息至少之一:逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following information: a logical channel identifier, and a cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
另一种发送指示的方式可以为:所述配置消息中还包括:逻辑信道所绑定的组标识;所述方法还包括:Another way of sending an indication may be: the configuration message further includes: a group identifier bound to the logical channel; the method further includes:
通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一接收网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制 传输状态;Use one of MAC CE, RRC message, or DCI to receive the transmission status of the logical channel with or without replication indicated by the network side;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所绑定的组标识、逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识至少之一。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the group identifier bound to the logical channel, the logical channel identifier, and the cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
也就是说,在网络侧发送给终端设备的配置消息中,同时指示绑定的组标识。而后在指示更新的消息,如在MAC CE中携带绑定的组标识、逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识至少之一。In other words, the configuration message sent to the terminal device from the network side also indicates the bound group identifier. Then the message indicating the update, such as the MAC CE, carries at least one of the bound group identifier, logical channel identifier, and cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
例如,参见图4,配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5绑定,则将DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5的绑定指示信息为Ture,boundFlag=1。For example, referring to Figure 4, if the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 will be bound with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3. The information is Ture, boundFlag=1.
新信息元素(IE)boundFlag,格式与实施例一相同,不再重复说明。The format of the new information element (IE) boundFlag is the same as in the first embodiment, and the description will not be repeated.
进一步地,本处理方式中还可以包括子方案2:Further, this processing method may also include sub-solution 2:
所述接收第一信息,包括:The receiving the first information includes:
接收网络侧发送的所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一逻辑信道对应的配置信息;所述配置信息中包含有与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道的标识,和/或,与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。Receiving configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels sent by the network side; the configuration information includes the identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel, and/or, and The CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
也就是,在逻辑信道对应的配置消息中,指示与之绑定的逻辑信道标识,和/或,之绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。绑定的逻辑信道为一组,指示其中一个逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活),即指示该组的所有逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。That is, the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel indicates the identifier of the logical channel bound to it, and/or the CG identifier to which the bound logical channel belongs. The bound logical channels are a group, indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
所述方法还包括:通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The method further includes: obtaining, through one of the MAC control element CE, RRC message, and DCI, the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel indicated by the network side;
其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下至少之一:逻辑信道、逻辑信道所所属的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: a logical channel and a CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
例如,配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5绑定,则可以在配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1时,携带boundLogicalChannels IE和CG-Idendity.For example, if the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 can be configured with boundLogicalChannels IE and CG-Idendity.
例如,新增IE,boundLogicalChannel,用于配置该逻辑信道对应的绑定的逻辑信道标识,和绑定的逻辑信道标识所属的cell group标识。具体的通过IE来指示绑定逻辑信道,可以包括有逻辑信道标识(LogicalChannelIdentity)以及小区组标识(CG-identity),具体的IE内容可以与实施例一相同,不再赘述。For example, a new IE, boundLogicalChannel, is used to configure the bound logical channel identifier corresponding to the logical channel and the cell group identifier to which the bound logical channel identifier belongs. Specifically, the IE is used to indicate the bound logical channel, which may include a logical channel identifier (LogicalChannelIdentity) and a cell group identifier (CG-identity). The specific IE content may be the same as in the first embodiment, and will not be repeated.
所述第一信息由RRC重配置消息携带。也就是说,基站通过RRC重配置消息通知所有的数据复制传输配置信息以及第一信息。The first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
可选的,基站在通过RRC reconfiguration IE中的LogicalChannelConfig IE中新增IE,用于通知第一信息。重用RRC重配消息的好处在于尽可能的重用现有的消息和过程,减少终端设备复杂度。具体IE格式参见前述说明,这里不再描述。Optionally, the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information. The advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment. For the specific IE format, please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be described here.
针对前述两种方案的后续处理,仍参见图3,终端设备接收来自基站(即网络侧)的RRC消息,根据RRC消息中的第一信息配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认配对信息和/或配对的逻辑信信道。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。其中,初始复制数据传输方式可以在网络侧发来的配置信息中包含,当然,也可以为终端设备默认的初始复制数据传输方式,可以为激活或去激活,即使用复制传输的方式或不使用复制传输的方式。进一步的,在初始传输方式配置中,可以配置激活或去激活使用的RLC实体。For the subsequent processing of the aforementioned two solutions, referring to Figure 3, the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station (ie, the network side), configures the RLC entity according to the first information in the RRC message, and confirms the pairing information and/or according to the first information Paired logical channel. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode. Among them, the initial copy data transmission method can be included in the configuration information sent from the network side. Of course, it can also be the default initial copy data transmission method of the terminal device. It can be activated or deactivated, that is, use the copy transmission method or not. Copy the transmission method. Further, in the initial transmission mode configuration, the RLC entity used for activation or deactivation can be configured.
当基站判断需要进行数据复制方式的变更时,如数据复制传输激活/去激活时,基站通过专用信息指示终端设备变更复制数据传输的状态为激活还是去激活。其中,专用信息可以为MAC CE,RRC,DCI信令。When the base station determines that it is necessary to change the data replication mode, such as when the data replication transmission is activated/deactivated, the base station instructs the terminal device to change the status of the replication data transmission to activation or deactivation through dedicated information. Among them, the dedicated information can be MAC CE, RRC, or DCI signaling.
终端设备接收来自基站的数据复制方式的变更指示消息,如通过MAC CE指示终端设备进行相应承载的数据复制传输激活/去激活时,终端设备按照MAC CE中相应的bit信息确定进行激活或者去激活操作,后续按照更新的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态进行数据传输。The terminal device receives a data copy mode change indication message from the base station. For example, when the terminal device is instructed to activate/deactivate the corresponding bearer data copy transmission through the MAC CE, the terminal device determines the activation or deactivation according to the corresponding bit information in the MAC CE Operation, subsequent data transmission is performed according to the updated data copy transmission activation/deactivation status.
MAC CE,RRC,DCI的格式可以如图5、6所示,以MAC CE为例进行说明,可以在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。其中,A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。LogicalchannelIdetity:代表指示的逻辑信道标识。CG-ID:代表指示的逻辑信道归属的Cell Group标识。The formats of MAC CE, RRC, and DCI can be shown in Figures 5 and 6, taking MAC CE as an example. A new LCID can be introduced in the MAC CE subheader to indicate replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling New format. Among them, A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits copy data. LogicalchannelIdetity: Represents the indicated logical channel identifier. CG-ID: Represents the cell group identifier to which the indicated logical channel belongs.
子方案3:Sub-program 3:
通过至少一种模式指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输的状态,也就是激活或去激活的状态;本方案以两种模式为例进行说明,分别为第一模式以及第二模式,具体的:At least one mode is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel, that is, the state of activation or deactivation; this solution uses two modes as examples for illustration, namely the first mode and the second mode, specific:
通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、和/或,第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。Use one of MAC CE, RRC message, or DCI to obtain the status of using replication transmission or non-use replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode, and/or use replication transmission or non-use of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode Copy the transmission status.
具体的,所述第一信息可以为逻辑信道的模式种类信息,包括mode 1,mode 2。其中,同种模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the first information may be mode type information of a logical channel, including mode 1, mode 2. Among them, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
具体的,配置为不同模式的,使用的指示bit位不同。Specifically, when the configuration is in different modes, the indication bits used are different.
例如:配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5的mode为1,其他逻辑信道mode为2,则可以在配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1时,携带BoundMode,根据该IE确定是哪个mode.For example: configure the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 and LC4 of DRB2, the mode of LC5 of DRB3 is 1, and the mode of other logical channels is 2, you can configure the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 with BoundMode, according to The IE determines which mode.
RRC配置例如IE BoundMode,用于配置该逻辑信道绑定的mode信息,具体参见实施例一的描述,这里不再赘述。The RRC configuration, for example, IE BoundMode, is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel binding. For details, refer to the description of Embodiment 1, which will not be repeated here.
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过不同行来指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,用于指示第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。需要理解的是,第一行与第二行可以相邻也可以不相邻,当然第一行与第二行可以为从上至下,也可以从下至上。In one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, different rows are used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the first mode uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status, and/or is used to indicate the second mode corresponds to The status of the logical channel using copy transmission or not using copy transmission. It should be understood that the first row and the second row may or may not be adjacent. Of course, the first row and the second row may be from top to bottom, or from bottom to top.
比如,参见图7,第一行代表mode1的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据,第二行代表mode2的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。For example, referring to Fig. 7, the first row represents whether the logical channel of mode 1 transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of mode 2 transmits copy data.
子方案4:Sub-program 4:
通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、以及选择模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。Obtain the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode and the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the selected mode through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI.
具体的,所述第一信息可以为逻辑信道的模式信息,包括full mode,select mode。其中,full mode代表逻辑信道与其他逻辑信道配对成组,该组逻辑信道采用公共bit指示是否传输复制数据,select mode代表逻辑信道无配对组,该逻辑信道需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。Specifically, the first information may be mode information of a logical channel, including full mode and select mode. Among them, full mode represents a logical channel paired with other logical channels to form a group, the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents a logical channel unpaired group, which requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data.
若逻辑信道配置为full mode,代表配对的逻辑信道激活/去激活状态相同,或者,配对的逻辑信道均激活,或者,配对的逻辑信道均去激活。If the logical channel is configured as full mode, it means that the paired logical channels have the same activation/deactivation status, or the paired logical channels are all activated, or the paired logical channels are all deactivated.
若逻辑信道配置为select mode,代表无配对,需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。If the logical channel is configured as select mode, it means that there is no pairing, and a separate bit is needed to indicate whether to transmit copy data.
例如:根据mode信息,确定最终可以支持的RLC实体激活方式。比如,配置4个逻辑信道/RLC实体,信道0,1,2,3的mode分别为full,select,full,select,这样支持的所有RLC激活的组合有以下几种(0代表对应RLC实体激活,1代表对应RLC实体去激活,顺序为RLC实体0,RLC实体1,RLC实体2,RLC实体3):(0,0,0,0),(1,0,1,0),(1,1,1,0),(1,0,1,1),(1,1,1,1).比如,这5种组合,可以用select mode对应行中的3个bit代表的不同取值来指示。可选的,leg组合方式或者所有RLC激活的组合方式,可以由基站通知终端设备,也可以是预先定义的。For example: According to the mode information, determine the RLC entity activation mode that can be finally supported. For example, configure 4 logical channels/RLC entities, and the modes of channels 0, 1, 2 and 3 are full, select, full, and select respectively, so that all supported combinations of RLC activation are as follows (0 represents the corresponding RLC entity activation , 1 represents the deactivation of the corresponding RLC entity, the order is RLC entity 0, RLC entity 1, RLC entity 2, RLC entity 3): (0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0), (1 ,1,1,0), (1,0,1,1), (1,1,1,1). For example, for these 5 combinations, you can use the select mode corresponding to the 3 bits in the row Value to indicate. Optionally, the leg combination mode or the combination mode of all RLC activations may be notified to the terminal equipment by the base station, or may be predefined.
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过第一行中的至少一个比特指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、以及通过第二行中的不同比特指示选择模式所对应的至少一个逻辑信道分别对应的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。比如,参见图7、8,图7中的第一行代表full mode的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据,第二行代表select mode的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;或者,如图8所示,在信息中A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;LogicalchannelIdetity:代表指示的逻辑信道标识;CG-ID:代表指示的逻辑信道归属的Cell Group标识;Index:代表对应指示的哪个可用于传输复制数据的逻辑信道组合。In one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, at least one bit in the first row is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and the difference in the second row The bit indicates the copy transmission or non-copy transmission state corresponding to at least one logical channel corresponding to the selection mode. For example, referring to Figures 7 and 8, the first row in Figure 7 represents whether the logical channel of full mode transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of select mode transmits copy data; or, as shown in Figure 8, in the information Middle A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits replicated data; LogicalchannelIdetity: Represents the indicated logical channel identifier; CG-ID: Represents the Cell Group ID to which the indicated logical channel belongs; Index: Represents which of the corresponding indications can be used to transmit replicated data Logical channel combination.
第二种处理方式、The second processing method,
所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的DRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态;The DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB;
或者,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的SRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态。Alternatively, the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
具体的,被绑定的SRB和/或DRB和与其配对DRB和/或SRB的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the bound SRB and/or DRB and its paired DRB and/or SRB is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
基于上述处理方式能够灵活有效的支持data duplication的指示的情况下,减少指示信息中需要的bit位,用尽可能简短/简单的bit指示,尽可能地减少多个bit指示引入带来的空口信令开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度。Based on the above processing method, it can flexibly and effectively support data duplication instructions, reduce the bits required in the instruction information, use the shortest/simple bit instructions, and reduce the air interface information caused by the introduction of multiple bit instructions as much as possible Make the overhead, reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and the base station.
具体步骤如下:Specific steps are as follows:
网络侧,比如基站,确定使用数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息,以及第一信息,用于指示第一信息为承载(DRB和/或SRB)之间的绑定关系。具体的,被绑定的承载和与其配对承载的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The network side, such as the base station, determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and informs the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information used to indicate that the first information is the binding between bearers (DRB and/or SRB) relationship. Specifically, the bound bearer is in the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation state as its paired bearer, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
例如,参见图4,配置DRB1和DRB2绑定,代表若指示DRB的使用复制数据传输,则同时DRB2也采用相同的复制数据传输。For example, referring to Fig. 4, configuring the binding of DRB1 and DRB2 means that if the use of DRB is instructed to replicate data transmission, DRB2 also uses the same replicated data transmission.
RRC IE见下:例如在RRC reconfiguration IE中的RadioBearerConfig IE中新增IE,boundDRBs,用于配置与此承载绑定的承载的标识。具体的与实施例一相同,不再赘述。The RRC IE is as follows: for example, in the RadioBearerConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, a newly added IE, boundDRBs, is used to configure the identity of the bearer bound to this bearer. The details are the same as in the first embodiment and will not be repeated.
基站通过RRC重配置消息通知所有的数据复制传输配置信息以及第一信息。The base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
可选的,基站在通过RRC reconfiguration IE中的LogicalChannelConfig IE中新增IE,用于通知第一信息。重用RRC重配消息的好处在于尽可能的重用现有的消息和过程,减少终端设备复杂度。具体IE格式参见前述说明,不再赘述。Optionally, the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information. The advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment. For the specific IE format, please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated.
终端设备接收来自基站的RRC消息,配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认配对信息和配对的承载信息。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。The terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the pairing information and the paired bearer information according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;Obtain the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有DRB或SRB的标识,或者,携带有DRB或SRB的标识以及DRB或SRB对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
MAC CE可以为以下的格式:The MAC CE can be in the following format:
可选的,在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。比如,参见图9,其中A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;DRB-identity:代表指示的DRB标识。Optionally, in the MAC CE subheader, a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling. For example, see Figure 9, where A/D: represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data; DRB-identity: represents the indicated DRB identity.
第三种处理方式、The third processing method,
所述载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系,用于通过指示载波的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,确定承载的逻辑信道的是否传输复制数据。The binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel transmits replicated data by indicating whether the carrier uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status.
也就是说,第一信息为载波和承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定信息。具体的,可以使用基于载波的激活/去激活的方式,指示对应承载的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。这里需要说明的是,通过载波指示的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据时,逻辑信道对应的承载可以是或者不是同一个承载。That is, the first information is the binding information between the carrier and the carried logical channel. Specifically, a carrier-based activation/deactivation method can be used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the bearer transmits duplicate data. It should be noted here that when the logical channel indicated by the carrier is used to transmit replicated data, the bearer corresponding to the logical channel may or may not be the same bearer.
具体步骤如下:Specific steps are as follows:
基站确定使用数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息,以及第一信息,用于指示第一信息为载波和逻辑信道(LC)之间的绑定关系。具体的,载波和与逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The base station determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information, which is used to indicate that the first information is the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel (LC). Specifically, the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
例如,参见图4,DRB1的LC1和DRB2的LC1通过载波1传输,指示载波是否使用复制数据传输,代表,DRB1的LC1和DRB2的LC1是否采用复制数据传输。根据IE allowedServingCells,确定载波和与逻辑信道的绑定关系For example, referring to Fig. 4, LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 are transmitted through carrier 1, indicating whether the carrier uses replicated data transmission, representing whether LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 use replicated data transmission. According to IE allowedServingCells, determine the carrier and the binding relationship with the logical channel
终端设备接收来自基站的RRC消息,配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认逻辑信道和载波的关系信息。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。The terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the logical channel and the carrier according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;Obtain the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。比如,参见图10,A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;ServCellIndex:代表指示的serving cell(载波)标识;CG-ID:代表指示的serving cell(载波)所属的cell group标识。In the MAC CE subheader, a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling. For example, referring to Figure 10, A/D: represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data; ServCellIndex: represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) identifier; CG-ID: represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) belongs to the cell group identifier.
第四种处理方式、The fourth treatment method,
所述载波之间的绑定关系,用于指示具备绑定关系的至少两个载波具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers with the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or no copy transmission status.
也就是说,第一信息为载波和载波之间的绑定信息。具体的,可以使用指示载波和与其配对的载波的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。In other words, the first information is the carrier and the binding information between the carriers. Specifically, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the indicated carrier and the carrier paired with the carrier can be used to be the same, that is, both the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
具体步骤如下:Specific steps are as follows:
基站确定使用数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息,以及第一信息,用于指示第一信息为载波和载波之间的绑定关系。具体的,载波和与载波的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。进一步的,根据逻辑信道对应允许使用的载波信息,确定载波和逻辑信道的绑定关系。具体的,载波和与逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。或者,可以使用与第三种处理方式的结合方式,在第一信息中携带载波和载波,载波和LC的绑定关系。The base station determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information, which is used to indicate that the first information is the carrier and the binding relationship between the carriers. Specifically, the carrier and the carrier have the same data copy transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit copy data or not transmit copy data. Further, the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel is determined according to the information of the carrier corresponding to the allowed use of the logical channel. Specifically, the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data. Alternatively, a combination with the third processing method may be used, and the first information carries the carrier and the carrier, and the binding relationship between the carrier and the LC.
例如,载波1和载波2绑定,通过指示载波1是否使用复制数据传输,同时代载波2是否采用复制数据传输。相应的,使用该载波传输复制数据的逻辑信道或者RLC实体采用相同的数据数据传输方式 (激活/去激活)For example, carrier 1 and carrier 2 are bound, by indicating whether carrier 1 uses replicated data transmission, and whether carrier 2 of the same generation uses replicated data transmission. Correspondingly, the logical channel or RLC entity that uses the carrier to transmit the copied data adopts the same data transmission method (activation/deactivation)
可选的,基站在通过RRC reconfiguration IE中的CellGroupConfig IE中新增IE,boundServingCells,用于指示与此载波绑定的载波。比如,可以与实施例一相同,不再赘述。Optionally, the base station adds an IE, boundServingCells, to the CellGroupConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, which is used to indicate the carrier bound to this carrier. For example, it can be the same as the first embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
终端设备接收来自基站的RRC消息,配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认载波之间的关系信息。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。The terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the carriers according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI的格式同第三种处理方式,具体为通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;The format of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is the same as the third processing method, specifically, the change instruction of the data copy transmission indicated by the network side is obtained through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
最后,针对MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI的格式进行说明,由于现有技术只能支持leg数最多为2的数据复制传输,而这与R16多于两个leg的需求是不匹配的。并且只支持一个bit位的激活/去激活指示方式,这种方法只能实现所有的leg都传输复制数据(激活),或者所有的leg不传输复制数据(去激活,只保留主leg传输PDCP PDU原本)的指示结果。但是,一旦基站想给不同的leg分别指示不同的激活/去激活行为(传或不传),则无法进行指示。因此,本发明实施例引出新的专用信息指示方式,如引入新的MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI格式,对应每个承载的每个leg(逻辑信道)各自使用1bit指示,用以指示该leg是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。Finally, the format of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is explained. Since the prior art can only support data replication and transmission with a maximum of 2 legs, this does not match the requirement of R16 for more than two legs. And only supports one-bit activation/deactivation indication method. This method can only realize that all legs transmit replicated data (activation), or all legs do not transmit replicated data (deactivate, and only retain the main leg to transmit PDCP PDU Original) instruction result. However, once the base station wants to indicate different activation/deactivation behaviors (transmission or non-transmission) to different legs, it cannot perform the instruction. Therefore, the embodiment of the present invention introduces new dedicated information indication methods, such as the introduction of new MAC CE, RRC messages, and DCI formats. Each leg (logical channel) corresponding to each bearer uses 1 bit indication to indicate whether the leg is Transfer copy data (activate/deactivate).
所述新的MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI,其可选格式之一如下:One of the optional formats of the new MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is as follows:
不同的列对应不同的DRB ID、或者载波标识、或者载波所属的小区组标识,对应方式跟现有协议一致;不同的行对应某一个DRB、或者载波标识、或者载波所属的小区组标识关联的不同RLC实体;比特位中的值代表是否采用该RLC实体传输复制数据;下面以DRB来进行说明:Different columns correspond to different DRB IDs, or carrier IDs, or cell group IDs to which the carriers belong, and the corresponding methods are consistent with existing protocols; different rows correspond to a certain DRB, or carrier ID, or the cell group ID to which the carrier belongs. Different RLC entities; the value in the bit represents whether the RLC entity is used to transmit replicated data; the following is described by DRB:
行数=max{为任意一个承载配置,用于复制数据输出的RLC实体/逻辑信道数},如为DRB 0配置的RLC实体数为4,为DRB3配置的RLC实体数为8,该MAC CE的行数为8。Number of rows = max {the number of RLC entities/logical channels used to copy data output for any bearer configuration}. For example, the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 0 is 4, and the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 3 is 8, the MAC CE The number of rows is 8.
或者,行数=限制的每个承载用于传输复制数据的RLC实体/逻辑信道数,该值可以为预设值,也可以为RRC配置的值。Or, the number of rows = the number of restricted RLC entities/logical channels used for transmitting replicated data for each bearer, and this value may be a preset value or a value configured by RRC.
例如,MCG有2个DRB配置了复制数据传输功能,DRB ID分别为0、3、5、7;For example, MCG has 2 DRBs configured with copy data transmission function, and the DRB IDs are 0, 3, 5, and 7 respectively;
MAC CE的格式为4个byte,那么从第1列到第4列一次按照DRB ID升序对应这些DRB。例如,D0,D1,D2,D3列分别对应DRB ID 0、3、5、7。每一列中的不同行指示采用哪些RLC实体传输复制数据,具体的,在该例子中可以指示最多4个RLC实体传输复制数据。按照先MCG再SCG的顺序排序,在每个CG内按照逻辑信道ID升序或者降序排序。或者,按照先SCG再MCG的顺序排序,在每个CG内按照逻辑信道ID升序或者降序排序。例如对DRB0的每行,分别从上到下,分别代表RLC实体0、1、2、3。The format of MAC CE is 4 bytes, so from column 1 to column 4 corresponding to these DRBs in ascending order of DRB ID at a time. For example, columns D0, D1, D2, and D3 correspond to DRB ID 0, 3, 5, and 7, respectively. Different rows in each column indicate which RLC entities are used to transmit replicated data. Specifically, in this example, a maximum of 4 RLC entities may be used to transmit replicated data. Sort in the order of MCG first, then SCG, and sort the logical channel ID in ascending or descending order within each CG. Or, sort according to the order of SCG first and then MCG, and sort the logical channel IDs in ascending or descending order within each CG. For example, for each row of DRB0, from top to bottom, they represent RLC entities 0, 1, 2, and 3.
具体流程参见图11,当终端设备根据第一信息确定并执行数据复制传输配置按照初始模式传输之后,接收网络侧基站通过新格式的MAC CE发来的指示,终端设备根据MAC CE的指示确定每一个leg是否传输复制数据。Refer to Figure 11 for the specific process. After the terminal device determines and executes the data copy transmission configuration according to the first information and transmits according to the initial mode, it receives the instruction sent by the network side base station through the MAC CE of the new format, and the terminal device determines the data transmission according to the MAC CE instruction. Whether a leg transmits copied data.
可见,通过采用上述方案,就能够通过第一信息确定所指示的对象,所指示的对象具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输的状态,并且第一信息中能够指示逻辑信道之间的绑定关系、DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系以及载波与逻辑信道或载波之间的绑定关系;从而提供了减少指示开销的、多种维度的数据复制传输控制方式,进而减少了空口信令的开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度,增加数据复制传输的灵活控制方式。It can be seen that by adopting the above solution, the indicated object can be determined through the first information. The indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding between logical channels. The fixed relationship, the binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB, and the binding relationship between carriers and logical channels or carriers; thereby providing a multi-dimensional data replication transmission control method that reduces indication overhead, thereby reducing air interface The overhead of signaling reduces the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increases flexible control methods for data replication and transmission.
实施例三、Example three
本发明实施例提供了一种网络设备,如图13所示,包括:The embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, as shown in FIG. 13, including:
第一通信单元41,向终端设备发送第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息;The first communication unit 41 sends first information to the terminal device; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission state; and /Or, the first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission;
其中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the first information includes at least one of the following:
逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between logical channels;
DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB;
载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between the carrier and the carried logical channel;
载波之间的绑定关系。The binding relationship between carriers.
其中,所述对象为承载、RLC(Radio Link Control,无线链路层控制协议)实体、逻辑信道、载波中之一。Wherein, the object is one of a bearer, an RLC (Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol) entity, a logical channel, and a carrier.
本实施例中所述使用复制传输模式,具体的可以为逻辑信道处于激活状态,也就是复制传输处于激 活状态;不使用复制传输模式,可以为逻辑信道为去激活状态,即不进行复制传输的状态。In this embodiment, the use of the copy transmission mode may specifically be that the logical channel is in the active state, that is, the copy transmission is in the active state; if the copy transmission mode is not used, the logical channel may be in the deactivated state, that is, the copy transmission is not performed. status.
下面针对前述几种绑定关系的处理方式分别进行说明:The following describes the processing methods of the aforementioned binding relationships:
所述逻辑信道之间的绑定关系包括以下之一:The binding relationship between the logical channels includes one of the following:
至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息;Binding relationship information of at least two logical channels;
至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息;First type mode information of at least two logical channels;
至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息。The second type mode information of at least two logical channels.
其中,所述逻辑信道为配置的可以用来传输PDCP PDU和/或其复制数据的逻辑信道。Wherein, the logical channel is a configured logical channel that can be used to transmit PDCP PDU and/or copy data thereof.
还需要指出的是,所述逻辑信道可以为终端设备的任意一个逻辑信道。与所述逻辑信道配对的逻辑信道可以属于不同的小区组(CG,Cell Group),也可以属于同一CG。和/或,配对的逻辑信道可以对应不同的承载,也可以对应相同的承载。It should also be pointed out that the logical channel may be any logical channel of the terminal device. The logical channels paired with the logical channels may belong to different cell groups (CG, Cell Group), or may belong to the same CG. And/or, the paired logical channels may correspond to different bearers or the same bearer.
进一步地,当配对的逻辑信道对应相同的承载,则逻辑信道为leg。Further, when the paired logical channels correspond to the same bearer, the logical channel is leg.
其中,关于legs的说明,数据复制传输时,一个PDCP实体的数据包可以由对应的多个RLC实体或逻辑信道进行传输,其中一个对应的RLC实体或逻辑信道即可成为一个leg。在本申请实施例中,可以假定legs数为n,n为大于等于1的整数。Among them, in the description of legs, when data is copied and transmitted, a data packet of a PDCP entity can be transmitted by multiple RLC entities or logical channels, and one of the corresponding RLC entities or logical channels can become a leg. In the embodiment of the present application, it can be assumed that the number of legs is n, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
具体的,所述至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息所指示的至少两个逻辑信道具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;具体的,被绑定的逻辑信道和与其配对逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same replication transmission or non-replication transmission status; specifically, the bound logical channel and the logical channel paired with it The data replication transmission activation/deactivation status is the same, that is, the replication data is transmitted or the replication data is not transmitted.
或者,or,
所述至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息,包括至少一个模式;其中,同一模式内对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同模式之间所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同。比如,至少一个模式可以有两个模式,比如第一模式以及第二模式,即mode 1和mode 2。其中,同种模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。不同模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态可以相同也可以不同。The first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes The status of the transmission with or without copying is the same or different. For example, at least one mode may have two modes, such as a first mode and a second mode, namely mode 1 and mode 2. Among them, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted. The data replication transmission activation/deactivation states of the logical channels of different modes may be the same or different.
或者or
所述至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息,包括至少一个全模式以及选择模式;其中,所述同一全模式中对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同的全模式之间对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;所述选择模式对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态分别进行指示。其中,全模式即full mode,选择模式select mode。所述full mode代表逻辑信道与其他逻辑信道配对成组,该组逻辑信道采用公共bit指示是否传输传输复制数据,select mode代表逻辑信道无配对组,该逻辑信道需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。The second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying. The use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated. Among them, the full mode is full mode, and the selection mode is select mode. The full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels into a group, and the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents the logical channel unpaired group, and the logical channel requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data .
需要指出的是,每一个全模式之间的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态可以相同也可以不同,比如,第一全模式与第二全模式的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态不同;第一全模式与第三全模式的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态相同。It should be pointed out that the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel between each full mode can be the same or different, for example, the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel of the first full mode and the second full mode Different; the first full mode and the third full mode have the same logical channel with or without copying transmission status.
还需要说明的是,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息,指的是,能通过第一信息中所指示的相关信息,使得终端设备确定对象之间的绑定信息。比如,当第一信息指示了逻辑信道1为绑定的逻辑信道,或者逻辑信道1为全模式的信道,逻辑信道3、4同样指示了为全模式的逻辑信道;也就是说,终端设备可以基于针对逻辑信道1、3、4的第一信息,确定逻辑信道1、3、4为具备绑定关系。其他粒度也是同样的处理方式,比如,针对DRB或者载波,可以同样为其设置绑定标识,另外的SRB和/或DRB也设置有相应的绑定标识的时候,DRB与SRB和/或DRB之间就具备绑定关系;这里不再一一进行赘述。It should also be noted that the first information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission, which means that the terminal device can determine the binding information between objects through the related information indicated in the first information. For example, when the first information indicates that logical channel 1 is a bound logical channel, or logical channel 1 is a full-mode channel, logical channels 3 and 4 also indicate a full-mode logical channel; that is, the terminal device can Based on the first information for the logical channels 1, 3, and 4, it is determined that the logical channels 1, 3, and 4 have a binding relationship. Other granularities are handled in the same way. For example, for DRB or carrier, you can also set the binding identifier for it. When other SRB and/or DRB are also set with the corresponding binding identifier, the difference between DRB and SRB and/or DRB There is a binding relationship between them; I will not repeat them here.
采用上述方式,在灵活有效的支持数据复制的指示的情况下,减少指示信息中需要的bit位,用尽可能简短/简单的bit指示,尽可能地减少多个bit指示引入带来的空口信令开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度。Using the above method, in the case of flexible and effective support for data replication instructions, reduce the number of bits required in the instruction information, use the shortest/simple bit instructions as possible, and minimize the air interface information caused by the introduction of multiple bit instructions. Make the overhead, reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and the base station.
第一种处理方式、The first approach,
本处理方式的具体流程,参见图3:For the specific process of this processing method, see Figure 3:
网络侧,具体可以为基站确定是否使用数据复制传输方式以及数据复制传输方式的相关配置信息。第一信息为强制mandatory配置或者可选optional配置。The network side can specifically determine whether to use the data replication transmission mode and the related configuration information of the data replication transmission mode for the base station. The first information is mandatory configuration or optional optional configuration.
网络侧,可以为基站,确定使用的数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息以及第一信息;第一信息用于指示逻辑信道之间的绑定关系。具体的,被绑定的逻辑信道和与其配对逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The network side may be the base station, determine the data replication transmission mode used, and notify the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information; the first information is used to indicate the binding relationship between the logical channels. Specifically, the bound logical channel is the same as the data replication transmission activation/deactivation state of its paired logical channel, that is, both transmit the copied data or not transmit the copied data.
进一步地,本处理方式中包括子方案1:Further, this processing method includes sub-scheme 1:
所述网络设备还包括:The network equipment also includes:
第一处理单元42,确定具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道;第一通信单元41,在向终端设备发送与所述至少两个逻辑信道对应的配置消息,所述配置信息用于指示所述第一信息;The first processing unit 42 determines that there are at least two logical channels with the same status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission; the first communication unit 41 is sending configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels to the terminal device, so The configuration information is used to indicate the first information;
其中,所述配置信息包括所述逻辑信道的绑定信息;当所述配置信息中指示的绑定信息为真时,表征所述逻辑信道为具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道中之一。Wherein, the configuration information includes the binding information of the logical channel; when the binding information indicated in the configuration information is true, it indicates that the logical channel is at least with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission. One of two logical channels.
也就是说,网络侧基站发送给终端设备的逻辑信道对应的配置消息中,指示绑定信息。若绑定指示信息为真(Ture),则代表逻辑信道绑定。进一步地,终端设备可以将所有绑定指示信息为Ture的逻辑信道设置为一组。通过指示其中一个逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活),即指示该组的所有逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。That is, the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel sent by the network side base station to the terminal device indicates the binding information. If the binding indication information is True, it represents logical channel binding. Further, the terminal device may set all logical channels whose binding indication information is True as a group. By indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
本方案中,第一通信单元41,可以通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下信息至少之一:逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识。In this solution, the first communication unit 41 can indicate to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel through one of the MAC control elements CE, RRC message, and DCI; wherein, the MAC CE, RRC message, One of the DCIs carries at least one of the following information: a logical channel identifier, and a cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
另一种发送指示的方式可以为:所述配置消息中还包括:逻辑信道所绑定的组标识;所述第一通信单元41,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所绑定的组标识、逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识至少之一。Another way of sending instructions may be: the configuration message further includes: the group identifier bound to the logical channel; the first communication unit 41 indicates the logic to the terminal device through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI Channel use replication transmission or non-use replication transmission status; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the group identifier bound to the logical channel, the logical channel identifier, and the cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel At least one.
也就是说,在网络侧发送给终端设备的配置消息中,同时指示绑定的组标识。而后在指示更新的消息,如在MAC CE中携带绑定的组标识、逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识至少之一。In other words, the configuration message sent to the terminal device from the network side also indicates the bound group identifier. Then the message indicating the update, such as the MAC CE, carries at least one of the bound group identifier, logical channel identifier, and cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
例如,参见图4,配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5绑定,则将DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5的绑定指示信息为Ture,boundFlag=1。For example, referring to Figure 4, if the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 will be bound with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3. The information is Ture, boundFlag=1.
新信息元素(IE)boundFlag,格式与实施例一相同,不再赘述。The format of the new information element (IE) boundFlag is the same as that in the first embodiment, and will not be repeated.
进一步地,本处理方式中还可以包括子方案2:Further, this processing method may also include sub-solution 2:
所述第一处理单元42,确定具备相同激活或去激活状态的至少两个逻辑信道;The first processing unit 42 determines at least two logical channels with the same activation or deactivation state;
第一通信单元41,向终端设备发送所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一逻辑信道对应的配置信息;所述配置信息中包含有与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道的标识,和/或,与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。The first communication unit 41 sends configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels to the terminal device; the configuration information includes the identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel, And/or, the CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
也就是,在逻辑信道对应的配置消息中,指示与之绑定的逻辑信道标识,和/或,之绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。绑定的逻辑信道为一组,指示其中一个逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活),即指示该组的所有逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。That is, the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel indicates the identifier of the logical channel bound to it, and/or the CG identifier to which the bound logical channel belongs. The bound logical channels are a group, indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
所述第一通信单元41,通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下至少之一:逻辑信道、逻辑信道所所属的小区组CG标识。The first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel through one of the MAC control elements CE, RRC message, and DCI; wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI One carries at least one of the following: the logical channel and the CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
例如,配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5绑定,则可以在配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1时,携带boundLogicalChannels IE和CG-Idendity.For example, if the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 can be configured with boundLogicalChannels IE and CG-Idendity.
例如,新增IE,boundLogicalChannel,用于配置该逻辑信道对应的绑定的逻辑信道标识,和绑定的逻辑信道标识所属的cell group标识。具体的通过IE来指示绑定逻辑信道,可以包括有逻辑信道标识(LogicalChannelIdentity)以及小区组标识(CG-identity),比如可以如实施例一所示,这里不做赘述。For example, a new IE, boundLogicalChannel, is used to configure the bound logical channel identifier corresponding to the logical channel and the cell group identifier to which the bound logical channel identifier belongs. Specifically, the IE is used to indicate the bound logical channel, which may include a logical channel identifier (LogicalChannelIdentity) and a cell group identifier (CG-identity). For example, it may be as shown in Embodiment 1, and will not be repeated here.
所述第一信息由RRC重配置消息携带。也就是说,基站通过RRC重配置消息通知所有的数据复制传输配置信息以及第一信息。The first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
可选的,基站在通过RRC reconfiguration IE中的LogicalChannelConfig IE中新增IE,用于通知第一信息。重用RRC重配消息的好处在于尽可能的重用现有的消息和过程,减少终端设备复杂度。具体IE格式参见前述说明,这里不再描述。Optionally, the base station adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information. The advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment. For the specific IE format, please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be described here.
针对前述两种方案的后续处理,仍参见图3,终端设备接收来自基站(即网络侧)的RRC消息,根据RRC消息中的第一信息配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认配对信息和/或配对的逻辑信信道。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。其中,初始复制数据传输方式可以在网络侧发来的配置信息中包含,当然,也可以为终端设备默认的初始复制数据传输方式,可以为激活或去激活,即使用复制传输的方式或不使用复制传输的方式。进一步的,在初始传输方式配置中,可以配置激活或去激活使用的RLC实体。For the subsequent processing of the aforementioned two solutions, referring to Figure 3, the terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station (ie, the network side), configures the RLC entity according to the first information in the RRC message, and confirms the pairing information and/or according to the first information Paired logical channel. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode. Among them, the initial copy data transmission method can be included in the configuration information sent from the network side. Of course, it can also be the default initial copy data transmission method of the terminal device. It can be activated or deactivated, that is, use the copy transmission method or not. Copy the transmission method. Further, in the initial transmission mode configuration, the RLC entity used for activation or deactivation can be configured.
当第一处理单元42判断需要进行数据复制方式的变更时,如数据复制传输激活/去激活时,第一通信单元41,通过专用信息指示终端设备变更复制数据传输的状态为激活还是去激活。其中,专用信息可以为MAC CE,RRC,DCI信令。When the first processing unit 42 determines that it is necessary to change the data replication mode, such as when data replication transmission is activated/deactivated, the first communication unit 41 instructs the terminal device to change the status of the replication data transmission to activation or deactivation through dedicated information. Among them, the dedicated information can be MAC CE, RRC, or DCI signaling.
MAC CE,RRC,DCI的格式可以如图5、6所示,以MAC CE为例进行说明,可以在MAC CE 子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。图6中A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。LogicalchannelIdetity:代表指示的逻辑信道标识。CG-ID:代表指示的逻辑信道归属的Cell Group标识。The formats of MAC CE, RRC, and DCI can be shown in Figures 5 and 6, taking MAC CE as an example. A new LCID can be introduced in the MAC CE sub-header to indicate replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling New format. A/D in Figure 6: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data. LogicalchannelIdetity: Represents the indicated logical channel identifier. CG-ID: Represents the cell group identifier to which the indicated logical channel belongs.
子方案3:Sub-program 3:
通过至少一种模式指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输的状态,也就是激活或去激活的状态;本方案以两种模式为例进行说明,分别为第一模式以及第二模式,具体的:At least one mode is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel, that is, the state of activation or deactivation; this solution uses two modes as examples for illustration, namely the first mode and the second mode, specific:
第一通信单元41,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device the use of replication transmission or non-use replication transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, and/or the logic corresponding to the second mode The channel's use copy transmission or not use copy transmission status.
具体的,所述第一信息可以为逻辑信道的模式种类信息,包括mode 1,mode 2。其中,同种模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the first information may be mode type information of a logical channel, including mode 1, mode 2. Among them, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
具体的,配置为不同模式的,使用的指示bit位不同。Specifically, when the configuration is in different modes, the indication bits used are different.
例如:配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5的mode为1,其他逻辑信道mode为2,则可以在配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1时,携带BoundMode,根据该IE确定是哪个mode.For example: configure the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 and LC4 of DRB2, the mode of LC5 of DRB3 is 1, and the mode of other logical channels is 2, you can configure the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 with BoundMode, according to The IE determines which mode.
RRC配置例如IE BoundMode,用于配置该逻辑信道绑定的mode信息,具体参见实施例一。The RRC configuration, for example, IE BoundMode, is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel binding. For details, refer to Embodiment 1.
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过不同行来指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,用于指示第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。需要理解的是,第一行与第二行可以相邻也可以不相邻,当然第一行与第二行可以为从上至下,也可以从下至上。In one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, different rows are used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the first mode uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status, and/or is used to indicate the second mode corresponds to The status of the logical channel using copy transmission or not using copy transmission. It should be understood that the first row and the second row may or may not be adjacent. Of course, the first row and the second row may be from top to bottom, or from bottom to top.
比如,参见图7,第一行代表mode1的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据,第二行代表mode2的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。For example, referring to Fig. 7, the first row represents whether the logical channel of mode 1 transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of mode 2 transmits copy data.
子方案4:Sub-program 4:
第一通信单元41,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,选择模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device the use of copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, and/or the selection of the logical channel corresponding to the mode Use copy transfer or not use copy transfer status.
具体的,所述第一信息可以为逻辑信道的模式信息,包括full mode,select mode。其中,full mode代表逻辑信道与其他逻辑信道配对成组,该组逻辑信道采用公共bit指示是否传输复制数据,select mode代表逻辑信道无配对组,该逻辑信道需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。Specifically, the first information may be mode information of a logical channel, including full mode and select mode. Among them, full mode represents a logical channel paired with other logical channels to form a group, the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents a logical channel unpaired group, which requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data.
若逻辑信道配置为full mode,代表配对的逻辑信道激活/去激活状态相同,或者,配对的逻辑信道均激活,或者,配对的逻辑信道均去激活。If the logical channel is configured as full mode, it means that the paired logical channels have the same activation/deactivation status, or the paired logical channels are all activated, or the paired logical channels are all deactivated.
若逻辑信道配置为select mode,代表无配对,需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。If the logical channel is configured as select mode, it means that there is no pairing, and a separate bit is needed to indicate whether to transmit copy data.
例如:根据mode信息,确定最终可以支持的RLC实体激活方式。比如,配置4个逻辑信道/RLC实体,信道0,1,2,3的mode分别为full,select,full,select,这样支持的所有RLC激活的组合有以下几种(0代表对应RLC实体激活,1代表对应RLC实体去激活,顺序为RLC实体0,RLC实体1,RLC实体2,RLC实体3):(0,0,0,0),(1,0,1,0),(1,1,1,0),(1,0,1,1),(1,1,1,1).比如,这5种组合,可以用select mode对应行中的3个bit代表的不同取值来指示。可选的,leg组合方式或者所有RLC激活的组合方式,可以由基站通知终端设备,也可以是预先定义的。For example: According to the mode information, determine the RLC entity activation mode that can be finally supported. For example, configure 4 logical channels/RLC entities, and the modes of channels 0, 1, 2 and 3 are full, select, full, and select respectively, so that all supported combinations of RLC activation are as follows (0 represents the corresponding RLC entity activation , 1 represents the deactivation of the corresponding RLC entity, the order is RLC entity 0, RLC entity 1, RLC entity 2, RLC entity 3): (0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0), (1 ,1,1,0), (1,0,1,1), (1,1,1,1). For example, for these 5 combinations, you can use the select mode corresponding to the 3 bits in the row Value to indicate. Optionally, the leg combination mode or the combination mode of all RLC activations may be notified to the terminal equipment by the base station, or may be predefined.
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过第一行中的至少一个比特指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,通过第二行中的不同比特指示选择模式所对应的至少一个逻辑信道分别对应的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。比如,参见图7、8,图7中的第一行代表full mode的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据,第二行代表select mode的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;或者,如图8所示,在信息中A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;LogicalchannelIdetity:代表指示的逻辑信道标识;CG-ID:代表指示的逻辑信道归属的Cell Group标识;Index:代表对应指示的哪个可用于传输复制数据的逻辑信道组合。In one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, at least one bit in the first row is used to indicate the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and/or, through the second row The different bits in indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission respectively corresponding to at least one logical channel corresponding to the selection mode. For example, referring to Figures 7 and 8, the first row in Figure 7 represents whether the logical channel of full mode transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of select mode transmits copy data; or, as shown in Figure 8, in the information Middle A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits replicated data; LogicalchannelIdetity: Represents the indicated logical channel identifier; CG-ID: Represents the Cell Group ID to which the indicated logical channel belongs; Index: Represents which of the corresponding indications can be used to transmit replicated data Logical channel combination.
第二种处理方式、The second processing method,
所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的DRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态;The DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB;
或者,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的SRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态。Alternatively, the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
具体的,被绑定的SRB和/或DRB和与其配对DRB和/或SRB的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the bound SRB and/or DRB and its paired DRB and/or SRB is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
基于上述处理方式能够灵活有效的支持data duplication的指示的情况下,减少指示信息中需要的bit位,用尽可能简短/简单的bit指示,尽可能地减少多个bit指示引入带来的空口信令开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度。Based on the above processing method, it can flexibly and effectively support data duplication instructions, reduce the bits required in the instruction information, use the shortest/simple bit instructions, and reduce the air interface information caused by the introduction of multiple bit instructions as much as possible Make the overhead, reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and the base station.
具体步骤如下:Specific steps are as follows:
网络侧,比如基站,确定使用数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息,以及第一信息,用于指示第一信息为承载(DRB和/或SRB)之间的绑定关系。具体的,被绑定的承载和与其配对承载的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The network side, such as the base station, determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and informs the terminal equipment of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information used to indicate that the first information is the binding between bearers (DRB and/or SRB) relationship. Specifically, the bound bearer is in the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation state as its paired bearer, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
例如,参见图4,配置DRB1和DRB2绑定,代表若指示DRB的使用复制数据传输,则同时DRB2也采用相同的复制数据传输。For example, referring to Fig. 4, configuring the binding of DRB1 and DRB2 means that if the use of DRB is instructed to replicate data transmission, DRB2 also uses the same replicated data transmission.
,RRC IE见下:例如在RRC reconfiguration IE中的RadioBearerConfig IE中新增IE,boundDRBs,用于配置与此承载绑定的承载的标识。具体的参见实施例一。, RRC IE see below: For example, in the RadioBearerConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE, a newly added IE, boundDRBs, is used to configure the identity of the bearer bound to this bearer. See Example 1 for details.
第一通信单元41,通过RRC重配置消息通知所有的数据复制传输配置信息以及第一信息。The first communication unit 41 notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
可选的,第一通信单元41,在通过RRC reconfiguration IE中的LogicalChannelConfig IE中新增IE,用于通知第一信息。重用RRC重配消息的好处在于尽可能的重用现有的消息和过程,减少终端设备复杂度。具体IE格式参见前述说明,不再赘述。Optionally, the first communication unit 41 adds an IE to the LogicalChannelConfig IE in the RRC reconfiguration IE for notifying the first information. The advantage of reusing RRC reconfiguration messages is to reuse existing messages and procedures as much as possible and reduce the complexity of terminal equipment. For the specific IE format, please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated.
终端设备接收来自基站的RRC消息,配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认配对信息和配对的承载信息。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。The terminal device receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the pairing information and the paired bearer information according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
所述第一通信单元41,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;The first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device a change instruction of data copy transmission through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有DRB或SRB的标识,或者,携带有DRB或SRB的标识、以及DRB或SRB对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
MAC CE可以为以下的格式:The MAC CE can be in the following format:
可选的,在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。比如,参见图9,其中A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;DRB-identity:代表指示的DRB标识。Optionally, in the MAC CE subheader, a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling. For example, see Figure 9, where A/D: represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data; DRB-identity: represents the indicated DRB identity.
第三种处理方式、The third processing method,
所述载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系,用于通过指示载波的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,确定承载的逻辑信道的是否传输复制数据。The binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel transmits replicated data by indicating whether the carrier uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status.
也就是说,第一信息为载波和承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定信息。具体的,可以使用基于载波的激活/去激活的方式,指示对应承载的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。这里需要说明的是,通过载波指示的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据时,逻辑信道对应的承载可以是或者不是同一个承载。That is, the first information is the binding information between the carrier and the carried logical channel. Specifically, a carrier-based activation/deactivation method can be used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the bearer transmits duplicate data. It should be noted here that when the logical channel indicated by the carrier is used to transmit replicated data, the bearer corresponding to the logical channel may or may not be the same bearer.
具体如下:details as follows:
第一处理单元确定使用数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息,以及第一信息,用于指示第一信息为载波和逻辑信道(LC)之间的绑定关系。具体的,载波和与逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The first processing unit determines to use the data replication transmission mode, and notifies the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode, and the first information used to indicate that the first information is the binding relationship between the carrier and the logical channel (LC). Specifically, the carrier and the logical channel have the same data replication transmission activation/deactivation status, that is, both transmit replicated data or do not transmit replicated data.
例如,参见图4,DRB1的LC1和DRB2的LC1通过载波1传输,指示载波是否使用复制数据传输,代表,DRB1的LC1和DRB2的LC1是否采用复制数据传输。根据IE allowedServingCells,确定载波和与逻辑信道的绑定关系For example, referring to Fig. 4, LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 are transmitted through carrier 1, indicating whether the carrier uses replicated data transmission, representing whether LC1 of DRB1 and LC1 of DRB2 use replicated data transmission. According to IE allowedServingCells, determine the carrier and the binding relationship with the logical channel
所述第一通信单元41,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;The first communication unit 41 indicates to the terminal device a change instruction of data copy transmission through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。比如,参见图10,A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;ServCellIndex:代表指示的serving cell(载波)标识;CG-ID:代表指示的serving cell(载波)所属的cell group标识。In the MAC CE subheader, a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling. For example, referring to Figure 10, A/D: represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data; ServCellIndex: represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) identifier; CG-ID: represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) belongs to the cell group identifier.
第四种处理方式、The fourth treatment method,
所述载波之间的绑定关系,用于指示具备绑定关系的至少两个载波具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers with the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or no copy transmission status.
也就是说,第一信息为载波和载波之间的绑定信息。具体的,可以使用指示载波和与其配对的载波的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。In other words, the first information is the carrier and the binding information between the carriers. Specifically, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the indicated carrier and the carrier paired with the carrier can be used to be the same, that is, both the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI的格式同第三种处理方式,具体为第一通信单元41,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中 之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。The formats of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI are the same as the third processing mode, specifically the first communication unit 41 instructs the terminal device to change the data copy transmission instruction through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI; One of the RRC message and the DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
最后,针对MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI的格式进行说明,本发明实施例引出新的专用信息指示方式,如引入新的MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI格式,对应每个承载的每个leg(逻辑信道)各自使用1bit指示,用以指示该leg是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。Finally, the format of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is described. The embodiment of the present invention introduces new dedicated information indication methods, such as the introduction of new MAC CE, RRC messages, and DCI formats, corresponding to each leg (logical Channels) each use a 1-bit indicator to indicate whether the leg transmits copy data (activation/deactivation).
所述新的MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI,其可选格式之一如下:One of the optional formats of the new MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI is as follows:
不同的列对应不同的DRB ID、或者载波标识、或者载波所属的小区组标识,对应方式跟现有协议一致;不同的行对应某一个DRB、或者载波标识、或者载波所属的小区组标识关联的不同RLC实体;比特位中的值代表是否采用该RLC实体传输复制数据;下面以DRB来进行说明:Different columns correspond to different DRB IDs, or carrier IDs, or cell group IDs to which the carriers belong, and the corresponding methods are consistent with existing protocols; different rows correspond to a certain DRB, or carrier ID, or the cell group ID to which the carrier belongs. Different RLC entities; the value in the bit represents whether the RLC entity is used to transmit replicated data; the following is described by DRB:
行数=max{为任意一个承载配置,用于复制数据输出的RLC实体/逻辑信道数},如为DRB 0配置的RLC实体数为4,为DRB3配置的RLC实体数为8,该MAC CE的行数为8。Number of rows = max {the number of RLC entities/logical channels used to copy data output for any bearer configuration}. For example, the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 0 is 4, and the number of RLC entities configured for DRB 3 is 8, the MAC CE The number of rows is 8.
或者,行数=限制的每个承载用于传输复制数据的RLC实体/逻辑信道数,该值可以为预设值,也可以为RRC配置的值。Or, the number of rows = the number of restricted RLC entities/logical channels used for transmitting replicated data for each bearer, and this value may be a preset value or a value configured by RRC.
例如,MCG有2个DRB配置了复制数据传输功能,DRB ID分别为0、3、5、7;For example, MCG has 2 DRBs configured with copy data transmission function, and the DRB IDs are 0, 3, 5, and 7 respectively;
MAC CE的格式为4个byte,那么从第1列到第4列一次按照DRB ID升序对应这些DRB。例如,D0,D1,D2,D3列分别对应DRB ID 0、3、5、7。每一列中的不同行指示采用哪些RLC实体传输复制数据,具体的,在该例子中可以指示最多4个RLC实体传输复制数据。按照先MCG再SCG的顺序排序,在每个CG内按照逻辑信道ID升序或者降序排序。或者,按照先SCG再MCG的顺序排序,在每个CG内按照逻辑信道ID升序或者降序排序。例如对DRB0的每行,分别从上到下,分别代表RLC实体0、1、2、3。The format of MAC CE is 4 bytes, so from column 1 to column 4 corresponding to these DRBs in ascending order of DRB ID at a time. For example, columns D0, D1, D2, and D3 correspond to DRB ID 0, 3, 5, and 7, respectively. Different rows in each column indicate which RLC entities are used to transmit replicated data. Specifically, in this example, a maximum of 4 RLC entities may be used to transmit replicated data. Sort in the order of MCG first, then SCG, and sort the logical channel ID in ascending or descending order within each CG. Or, sort according to the order of SCG first and then MCG, and sort the logical channel IDs in ascending or descending order within each CG. For example, for each row of DRB0, from top to bottom, they represent RLC entities 0, 1, 2, and 3.
具体流程参见图11,当终端设备根据第一信息确定并执行数据复制传输配置按照初始模式传输之后,接收网络侧基站通过新格式的MAC CE发来的指示,终端设备根据MAC CE的指示确定每一个leg是否传输复制数据。Refer to Figure 11 for the specific process. After the terminal device determines and executes the data copy transmission configuration according to the first information and transmits according to the initial mode, it receives the instruction sent by the network side base station through the MAC CE of the new format, and the terminal device determines the data transmission according to the MAC CE instruction. Whether a leg transmits copied data.
可见,通过采用上述方案,就能够通过第一信息确定所指示的对象,所指示的对象具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输的状态,并且第一信息中能够指示逻辑信道之间的绑定关系、DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系以及载波与逻辑信道或载波之间的绑定关系;从而提供了减少指示开销的、多种维度的数据复制传输控制方式,进而减少了空口信令的开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度,增加数据复制传输的灵活控制方式。It can be seen that by adopting the above solution, the indicated object can be determined through the first information. The indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding between logical channels. The fixed relationship, the binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB, and the binding relationship between carriers and logical channels or carriers; thereby providing a multi-dimensional data replication transmission control method that reduces indication overhead, thereby reducing air interface The overhead of signaling reduces the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increases flexible control methods for data replication and transmission.
实施例四、Example 4
本发明实施例提供了一种终端设备,如图14所示,包括:The embodiment of the present invention provides a terminal device, as shown in FIG. 14, including:
第二通信单元51,接收第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息;The second communication unit 51 receives first information; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission state; and/or, The first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission;
其中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:Wherein, the first information includes at least one of the following:
逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between logical channels;
DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB;
载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between the carrier and the carried logical channel;
载波之间的绑定关系。The binding relationship between carriers.
其中,所述对象为承载、RLC(Radio Link Control,无线链路层控制协议)实体、逻辑信道、载波中之一。Wherein, the object is one of a bearer, an RLC (Radio Link Control, Radio Link Control Protocol) entity, a logical channel, and a carrier.
本实施例中所述使用复制传输模式,具体的可以为逻辑信道处于激活状态,也就是复制传输处于激活状态;不使用复制传输模式,可以为逻辑信道为去激活状态,即不进行复制传输的状态。In this embodiment, the use of the copy transmission mode may specifically be that the logical channel is in the active state, that is, the copy transmission is in the active state; if the copy transmission mode is not used, the logical channel may be in the deactivated state, that is, the copy transmission is not performed. status.
下面针对前述几种绑定关系的处理方式分别进行说明:The following describes the processing methods of the aforementioned binding relationships:
所述逻辑信道之间的绑定关系包括以下之一:The binding relationship between the logical channels includes one of the following:
至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息;Binding relationship information of at least two logical channels;
至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息;First type mode information of at least two logical channels;
至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息。The second type mode information of at least two logical channels.
其中,所述逻辑信道为配置的可以用来传输PDCP PDU和/或其复制数据的逻辑信道。Wherein, the logical channel is a configured logical channel that can be used to transmit PDCP PDU and/or copy data thereof.
还需要指出的是,所述逻辑信道可以为终端设备的任意一个逻辑信道。与所述逻辑信道配对的逻辑信道可以属于不同的小区组(CG,Cell Group),也可以属于同一CG。和/或,配对的逻辑信道可以对应不同的承载,也可以对应相同的承载。It should also be pointed out that the logical channel may be any logical channel of the terminal device. The logical channels paired with the logical channels may belong to different cell groups (CG, Cell Group), or may belong to the same CG. And/or, the paired logical channels may correspond to different bearers or the same bearer.
进一步地,当配对的逻辑信道对应相同的承载,则逻辑信道为leg。Further, when the paired logical channels correspond to the same bearer, the logical channel is leg.
其中,关于legs的说明,数据复制传输时,一个PDCP实体的数据包可以由对应的多个RLC实体或逻辑信道进行传输,其中一个对应的RLC实体或逻辑信道即可成为一个leg。在本申请实施例中,可以假定legs数为n,n为大于等于1的整数。Among them, in the description of legs, when data is copied and transmitted, a data packet of a PDCP entity can be transmitted by multiple RLC entities or logical channels, and one of the corresponding RLC entities or logical channels can become a leg. In the embodiment of the present application, it can be assumed that the number of legs is n, and n is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
具体的,所述至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息所指示的至少两个逻辑信道具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;具体的,被绑定的逻辑信道和与其配对逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same replication transmission or non-replication transmission status; specifically, the bound logical channel and the logical channel paired with it The data replication transmission activation/deactivation status is the same, that is, the replication data is transmitted or the replication data is not transmitted.
或者,or,
所述至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息,包括至少一个模式;其中,同一模式内对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同模式之间所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同。比如,至少一个模式可以有两个模式,比如第一模式以及第二模式,即mode 1和mode 2。其中,同种模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。不同模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态可以相同也可以不同。The first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes The status of the transmission with or without copying is the same or different. For example, at least one mode may have two modes, such as a first mode and a second mode, namely mode 1 and mode 2. Among them, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted. The data replication transmission activation/deactivation states of the logical channels of different modes may be the same or different.
或者or
所述至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息,包括至少一个全模式以及选择模式;其中,所述同一全模式中对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同的全模式之间对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;所述选择模式对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态分别进行指示。其中,全模式即full mode,选择模式select mode。所述full mode代表逻辑信道与其他逻辑信道配对成组,该组逻辑信道采用公共bit指示是否传输传输复制数据,select mode代表逻辑信道无配对组,该逻辑信道需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。The second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying. The use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated. Among them, the full mode is full mode, and the selection mode is select mode. The full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels into a group, and the group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents the logical channel unpaired group, and the logical channel requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data .
需要指出的是,每一个全模式之间的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态可以相同也可以不同,比如,第一全模式与第二全模式的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态不同;第一全模式与第三全模式的逻辑信道的使用或不使用复制传输状态相同。It should be pointed out that the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel between each full mode can be the same or different, for example, the use or non-use replication transmission state of the logical channel of the first full mode and the second full mode Different; the first full mode and the third full mode have the same logical channel with or without copying transmission status.
还需要说明的是,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息,指的是,能通过第一信息中所指示的相关信息,使得终端设备确定对象之间的绑定信息。比如,当第一信息指示了逻辑信道1为绑定的逻辑信道,或者逻辑信道1为全模式的信道,逻辑信道3、4同样指示了为全模式的逻辑信道;也就是说,终端设备可以基于针对逻辑信道1、3、4的第一信息,确定逻辑信道1、3、4为具备绑定关系。其他粒度也是同样的处理方式,比如,针对DRB或者载波,可以同样为其设置绑定标识,另外的SRB和/或DRB也设置有相应的绑定标识的时候,DRB与SRB和/或DRB之间就具备绑定关系;这里不再一一进行赘述。It should also be noted that the first information is used to determine the binding information for data replication and transmission, which means that the terminal device can determine the binding information between objects through the related information indicated in the first information. For example, when the first information indicates that logical channel 1 is a bound logical channel, or logical channel 1 is a full-mode channel, logical channels 3 and 4 also indicate a full-mode logical channel; that is, the terminal device can Based on the first information for the logical channels 1, 3, and 4, it is determined that the logical channels 1, 3, and 4 have a binding relationship. Other granularities are handled in the same way. For example, for DRB or carrier, you can also set the binding identifier for it. When other SRB and/or DRB are also set with the corresponding binding identifier, the difference between DRB and SRB and/or DRB There is a binding relationship between them; I will not repeat them here.
采用上述方式,在灵活有效的支持数据复制的指示的情况下,减少指示信息中需要的bit位,用尽可能简短/简单的bit指示,尽可能地减少多个bit指示引入带来的空口信令开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度。Using the above method, in the case of flexible and effective support for data replication instructions, reduce the number of bits required in the instruction information, use the shortest/simple bit instructions as possible, and minimize the air interface information caused by the introduction of multiple bit instructions. Make the overhead, reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and the base station.
第一种处理方式、The first approach,
本处理方式的具体流程,参见图3:For the specific process of this processing method, see Figure 3:
网络侧,具体可以为基站确定是否使用数据复制传输方式以及数据复制传输方式的相关配置信息。第一信息为强制mandatory配置或者可选optional配置。The network side can specifically determine whether to use the data replication transmission mode and the related configuration information of the data replication transmission mode for the base station. The first information is mandatory configuration or optional optional configuration.
网络侧,可以为基站,确定使用的数据复制传输方式,并通知终端设备数据复制方式对应的配置信息以及第一信息;第一信息用于指示逻辑信道之间的绑定关系。具体的,被绑定的逻辑信道和与其配对逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。The network side may be the base station, determine the data replication transmission mode used, and notify the terminal device of the configuration information corresponding to the data replication mode and the first information; the first information is used to indicate the binding relationship between the logical channels. Specifically, the bound logical channel is the same as the data replication transmission activation/deactivation state of its paired logical channel, that is, both transmit the copied data or not transmit the copied data.
进一步地,本处理方式中包括子方案1:Further, this processing method includes sub-scheme 1:
所述第二通信单元51,接收与所述至少两个逻辑信道对应的配置消息,所述配置信息用于指示所述第一信息;其中,所述配置信息包括所述逻辑信道的绑定信息;当所述配置信息中指示的绑定信息为真时,表征所述逻辑信道为具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道中之一;The second communication unit 51 receives configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels, where the configuration information is used to indicate the first information; wherein, the configuration information includes binding information of the logical channels When the binding information indicated in the configuration information is true, it indicates that the logical channel is one of at least two logical channels with the same state of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
基于所述配置消息,确定至少两个逻辑信道的绑定信息,以及根据初始复制数据传输方式控制至少两个逻辑信道进行传输。Based on the configuration message, the binding information of at least two logical channels is determined, and the at least two logical channels are controlled to transmit according to the initial replication data transmission mode.
也就是说,网络侧基站发送给终端设备的逻辑信道对应的配置消息中,指示绑定信息。若绑定指示信息为真(Ture),则代表逻辑信道绑定。进一步地,终端设备可以将所有绑定指示信息为Ture的逻辑信道设置为一组。通过指示其中一个逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活),即指示该组的所有逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。That is, the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel sent by the network side base station to the terminal device indicates the binding information. If the binding indication information is True, it represents logical channel binding. Further, the terminal device may set all logical channels whose binding indication information is True as a group. By indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
本方案中,第二通信单元51,通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一接收网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;In this solution, the second communication unit 51 receives, through one of the MAC control element CE, the RRC message, and the DCI, the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel indicated by the network side;
其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下信息至少之一:逻辑信道标识,逻辑信 道所对应的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following information: a logical channel identifier, and a cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
另一种发送指示的方式可以为:所述配置消息中还包括:逻辑信道所绑定的组标识;第二通信单元51,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一接收网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;Another way to send instructions may be: the configuration message further includes: the group identifier bound to the logical channel; the second communication unit 51 receives the logic indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI Channel use copy transmission or not use copy transmission status;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所绑定的组标识、逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识至少之一。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the group identifier bound to the logical channel, the logical channel identifier, and the cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
也就是说,在网络侧发送给终端设备的配置消息中,同时指示绑定的组标识。而后在指示更新的消息,如在MAC CE中携带绑定的组标识、逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识至少之一。In other words, the configuration message sent to the terminal device from the network side also indicates the bound group identifier. Then the message indicating the update, such as the MAC CE, carries at least one of the bound group identifier, logical channel identifier, and cell group CG identifier corresponding to the logical channel.
进一步地,本处理方式中还可以包括子方案2:Further, this processing method may also include sub-solution 2:
所述第二通信单元51,接收网络侧发送的所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一逻辑信道对应的配置信息;所述配置信息中包含有与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道的标识,和/或,与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。The second communication unit 51 receives configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels sent by the network side; the configuration information includes the logical channel bound to the first logical channel And/or the CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
也就是,在逻辑信道对应的配置消息中,指示与之绑定的逻辑信道标识,和/或,之绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。绑定的逻辑信道为一组,指示其中一个逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活),即指示该组的所有逻辑信道是否传输复制数据(激活/去激活)。That is, the configuration message corresponding to the logical channel indicates the identifier of the logical channel bound to it, and/or the CG identifier to which the bound logical channel belongs. The bound logical channels are a group, indicating whether one of the logical channels transmits duplicate data (activation/deactivation), that is, indicates whether all logical channels of the group transmit duplicate data (activation/deactivation).
所述方法还包括:通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The method further includes: obtaining, through one of the MAC control element CE, RRC message, and DCI, the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel indicated by the network side;
其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下至少之一:逻辑信道、逻辑信道所所属的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: a logical channel and a CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
例如,配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5绑定,则可以在配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1时,携带boundLogicalChannels IE和CG-Idendity.For example, if the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 is configured to bind with LC4 of DRB2 and LC5 of DRB3, then the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 can be configured with boundLogicalChannels IE and CG-Idendity.
所述第一信息由RRC重配置消息携带。也就是说,基站通过RRC重配置消息通知所有的数据复制传输配置信息以及第一信息。The first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message. That is, the base station notifies all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
MAC CE,RRC,DCI的格式可以如图5、6所示,以MAC CE为例进行说明,可以在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。其中,A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。LogicalchannelIdetity:代表指示的逻辑信道标识。CG-ID:代表指示的逻辑信道归属的Cell Group标识。The formats of MAC CE, RRC, and DCI can be shown in Figures 5 and 6, taking MAC CE as an example. A new LCID can be introduced in the MAC CE subheader to indicate replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling New format. Among them, A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits copy data. LogicalchannelIdetity: Represents the indicated logical channel identifier. CG-ID: Represents the cell group identifier to which the indicated logical channel belongs.
子方案3:Sub-program 3:
通过至少一种模式指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输的状态,也就是激活或去激活的状态;本方案以两种模式为例进行说明,分别为第一模式以及第二模式,具体的:At least one mode is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel, that is, the state of activation or deactivation; this solution uses two modes as examples for illustration, namely the first mode and the second mode, specific:
第二通信单元51,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、和/或,第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The second communication unit 51, through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, obtains the status of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode using replication transmission or not using replication transmission, and/or the status of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode Use copy transfer or not use copy transfer status.
具体的,所述第一信息可以为逻辑信道的模式种类信息,包括mode 1,mode 2。其中,同种模式的逻辑信道的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the first information may be mode type information of a logical channel, including mode 1, mode 2. Among them, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the logical channels of the same mode is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
具体的,配置为不同模式的,使用的指示bit位不同。Specifically, when the configuration is in different modes, the indication bits used are different.
例如:配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1,和DRB2的LC4,DRB3的LC5的mode为1,其他逻辑信道mode为2,则可以在配置DRB1的逻辑信道(LC)1时,携带BoundMode,根据该IE确定是哪个mode.For example: configure the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 and LC4 of DRB2, the mode of LC5 of DRB3 is 1, and the mode of other logical channels is 2, you can configure the logical channel (LC) 1 of DRB1 with BoundMode, according to The IE determines which mode.
RRC配置例如IE BoundMode,用于配置该逻辑信道绑定的mode信息,具体参见实施例一。The RRC configuration, for example, IE BoundMode, is used to configure the mode information of the logical channel binding. For details, refer to Embodiment 1.
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过不同行来指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,用于指示第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。需要理解的是,第一行与第二行可以相邻也可以不相邻,当然第一行与第二行可以为从上至下,也可以从下至上。In one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, different rows are used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the first mode uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status, and/or is used to indicate the second mode corresponds to The status of the logical channel using copy transmission or not using copy transmission. It should be understood that the first row and the second row may or may not be adjacent. Of course, the first row and the second row may be from top to bottom, or from bottom to top.
比如,参见图7,第一行代表mode1的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据,第二行代表mode2的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。For example, referring to Fig. 7, the first row represents whether the logical channel of mode 1 transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of mode 2 transmits copy data.
子方案4:Sub-program 4:
第二通信单元51,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、以及选择模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The second communication unit 51 obtains the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, and the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the selected mode. Use copy transfer status.
具体的,所述第一信息可以为逻辑信道的模式信息,包括full mode,select mode。其中,full mode代表逻辑信道与其他逻辑信道配对成组,该组逻辑信道采用公共bit指示是否传输复制数据,select mode 代表逻辑信道无配对组,该逻辑信道需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。Specifically, the first information may be mode information of a logical channel, including full mode and select mode. Among them, full mode represents that the logical channel is paired with other logical channels to form a group. The group of logical channels uses a common bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data, and select mode represents a logical channel unpaired group, which requires a separate bit to indicate whether to transmit replicated data.
若逻辑信道配置为full mode,代表配对的逻辑信道激活/去激活状态相同,或者,配对的逻辑信道均激活,或者,配对的逻辑信道均去激活。If the logical channel is configured as full mode, it means that the paired logical channels have the same activation/deactivation status, or the paired logical channels are all activated, or the paired logical channels are all deactivated.
若逻辑信道配置为select mode,代表无配对,需要单独的bit指示是否传输复制数据。If the logical channel is configured as select mode, it means that there is no pairing, and a separate bit is needed to indicate whether to transmit copy data.
例如:根据mode信息,确定最终可以支持的RLC实体激活方式。比如,配置4个逻辑信道/RLC实体,信道0,1,2,3的mode分别为full,select,full,select,这样支持的所有RLC激活的组合有以下几种(0代表对应RLC实体激活,1代表对应RLC实体去激活,顺序为RLC实体0,RLC实体1,RLC实体2,RLC实体3):(0,0,0,0),(1,0,1,0),(1,1,1,0),(1,0,1,1),(1,1,1,1).比如,这5种组合,可以用select mode对应行中的3个bit代表的不同取值来指示。可选的,leg组合方式或者所有RLC激活的组合方式,可以由基站通知终端设备,也可以是预先定义的。For example: According to the mode information, determine the RLC entity activation mode that can be finally supported. For example, configure 4 logical channels/RLC entities, and the modes of channels 0, 1, 2 and 3 are full, select, full, and select respectively, so that all supported combinations of RLC activation are as follows (0 represents the corresponding RLC entity activation , 1 represents the deactivation of the corresponding RLC entity, the order is RLC entity 0, RLC entity 1, RLC entity 2, RLC entity 3): (0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0), (1 ,1,1,0), (1,0,1,1), (1,1,1,1). For example, for these 5 combinations, you can use the select mode corresponding to the 3 bits in the row Value to indicate. Optionally, the leg combination mode or the combination mode of all RLC activations may be notified to the terminal equipment by the base station, or may be predefined.
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过第一行中的至少一个比特指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、以及通过第二行中的不同比特指示选择模式所对应的至少一个逻辑信道分别对应的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。比如,参见图7、8,图7中的第一行代表full mode的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据,第二行代表select mode的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;或者,如图8所示,在信息中A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;LogicalchannelIdetity:代表指示的逻辑信道标识;CG-ID:代表指示的逻辑信道归属的Cell Group标识;Index:代表对应指示的哪个可用于传输复制数据的逻辑信道组合。In one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, at least one bit in the first row is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and the difference in the second row The bit indicates the copy transmission or non-copy transmission state corresponding to at least one logical channel corresponding to the selection mode. For example, referring to Figures 7 and 8, the first row in Figure 7 represents whether the logical channel of full mode transmits copy data, and the second row represents whether the logical channel of select mode transmits copy data; or, as shown in Figure 8, in the information Middle A/D: Represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits replicated data; LogicalchannelIdetity: Represents the indicated logical channel identifier; CG-ID: Represents the Cell Group ID to which the indicated logical channel belongs; Index: Represents which of the corresponding indications can be used to transmit replicated data Logical channel combination.
第二种处理方式、The second processing method,
所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的DRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态;The DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB;
或者,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的SRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态。Alternatively, the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
具体的,被绑定的SRB和/或DRB和与其配对DRB和/或SRB的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。Specifically, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the bound SRB and/or DRB and its paired DRB and/or SRB is the same, that is, the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
基于上述处理方式能够灵活有效的支持data duplication的指示的情况下,减少指示信息中需要的bit位,用尽可能简短/简单的bit指示,尽可能地减少多个bit指示引入带来的空口信令开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度。Based on the above processing method, it can flexibly and effectively support data duplication instructions, reduce the bits required in the instruction information, use the shortest/simple bit instructions, and reduce the air interface information caused by the introduction of multiple bit instructions as much as possible Make the overhead, reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and the base station.
第二通信单元51,通过RRC重配置消息获取所有的数据复制传输配置信息以及第一信息。The second communication unit 51 obtains all the data replication transmission configuration information and the first information through the RRC reconfiguration message.
终端设备还包括第二处理单元52,接收来自基站的RRC消息,配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认配对信息和配对的承载信息。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。The terminal device also includes a second processing unit 52, which receives the RRC message from the base station, configures the RLC entity, and confirms the pairing information and the paired bearer information according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
所述第二通信单元51,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;The second communication unit 51 obtains the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有DRB或SRB的标识,或者,携带有DRB或SRB的标识以及DRB或SRB对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
MAC CE可以为以下的格式:The MAC CE can be in the following format:
可选的,在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。比如,参见图9,其中A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;DRB-identity:代表指示的DRB标识。Optionally, in the MAC CE subheader, a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling. For example, see Figure 9, where A/D: represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data; DRB-identity: represents the indicated DRB identity.
第三种处理方式、The third processing method,
所述载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系,用于通过指示载波的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,确定承载的逻辑信道的是否传输复制数据。The binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel transmits replicated data by indicating whether the carrier uses replication transmission or does not use replication transmission status.
也就是说,第一信息为载波和承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定信息。具体的,可以使用基于载波的激活/去激活的方式,指示对应承载的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据。这里需要说明的是,通过载波指示的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据时,逻辑信道对应的承载可以是或者不是同一个承载。That is, the first information is the binding information between the carrier and the carried logical channel. Specifically, a carrier-based activation/deactivation method can be used to indicate whether the logical channel corresponding to the bearer transmits duplicate data. It should be noted here that when the logical channel indicated by the carrier is used to transmit replicated data, the bearer corresponding to the logical channel may or may not be the same bearer.
第二通信单元51,接收来自基站的RRC消息,第二处理单元52配置RLC实体,根据第一信息确认逻辑信道和载波的关系信息。终端设备随后按照初始复制数据传输方式进行传输。The second communication unit 51 receives the RRC message from the base station, and the second processing unit 52 configures the RLC entity, and confirms the relationship information between the logical channel and the carrier according to the first information. The terminal device then transmits according to the initial copy data transmission mode.
所述第二通信单元51,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;The second communication unit 51 obtains the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
在MAC CE子头中,引入新的LCID,用于指示复制数据传输激活/去激活信令的新格式。比如,参见图10,A/D:代表对应逻辑信道是否传输复制数据;ServCellIndex:代表指示的serving cell(载 波)标识;CG-ID:代表指示的serving cell(载波)所属的cell group标识。In the MAC CE subheader, a new LCID is introduced to indicate the new format of the replication data transmission activation/deactivation signaling. For example, referring to Figure 10, A/D: represents whether the corresponding logical channel transmits duplicate data; ServCellIndex: represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) identification; CG-ID: represents the indicated serving cell (carrier) belongs to the cell group identification.
第四种处理方式、The fourth treatment method,
所述载波之间的绑定关系,用于指示具备绑定关系的至少两个载波具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers with the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or no copy transmission status.
也就是说,第一信息为载波和载波之间的绑定信息。具体的,可以使用指示载波和与其配对的载波的数据复制传输激活/去激活状态相同,即均传输复制数据或者不传输复制数据。In other words, the first information is the carrier and the binding information between the carriers. Specifically, the data replication transmission activation/deactivation status of the indicated carrier and the carrier paired with the carrier can be used to be the same, that is, both the replicated data is transmitted or the replicated data is not transmitted.
第二通信单元51,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;The second communication unit 51 obtains the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
需要指出的是,本实施例中各个功能单元的处理与前述方法实施例相同,因此不再进行赘述。It should be pointed out that the processing of each functional unit in this embodiment is the same as the foregoing method embodiment, and therefore will not be repeated.
可见,通过采用上述方案,就能够通过第一信息确定所指示的对象,所指示的对象具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输的状态,并且第一信息中能够指示逻辑信道之间的绑定关系、DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系以及载波与逻辑信道或载波之间的绑定关系;从而提供了减少指示开销的、多种维度的数据复制传输控制方式,进而减少了空口信令的开销,降低终端设备和基站的处理复杂度,增加数据复制传输的灵活控制方式。It can be seen that by adopting the above solution, the indicated object can be determined through the first information. The indicated object has the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission, and the first information can indicate the binding between logical channels. The fixed relationship, the binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB, and the binding relationship between carriers and logical channels or carriers; thereby providing a multi-dimensional data replication transmission control method that reduces indication overhead, thereby reducing air interface The overhead of signaling reduces the processing complexity of terminal equipment and base stations, and increases flexible control methods for data replication and transmission.
图15是本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备600示意性结构图,通信设备可以为本实施例前述的终端设备或者网络设备。图6所示的通信设备600包括处理器610,处理器610可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device may be the aforementioned terminal device or network device in this embodiment. The communication device 600 shown in FIG. 6 includes a processor 610, and the processor 610 can call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the method in the embodiments of the present application.
可选地,如图15所示,通信设备600还可以包括存储器620。其中,处理器610可以从存储器620中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 15, the communication device 600 may further include a memory 620. The processor 610 can call and run a computer program from the memory 620 to implement the method in the embodiments of the present application.
其中,存储器620可以是独立于处理器610的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器610中。The memory 620 may be a separate device independent of the processor 610, or may be integrated in the processor 610.
可选地,如图15所示,通信设备600还可以包括收发器630,处理器610可以控制该收发器630与其他设备进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备发送信息或数据,或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 15, the communication device 600 may further include a transceiver 630, and the processor 610 may control the transceiver 630 to communicate with other devices. Specifically, it may send information or data to other devices, or receive other devices. Information or data sent by the device.
其中,收发器630可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器630还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。Among them, the transceiver 630 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 630 may further include antennas, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
可选地,该通信设备600具体可为本申请实施例的网络设备,并且该通信设备600可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the communication device 600 may specifically be a network device according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 600 may implement the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. .
可选地,该通信设备600具体可为本申请实施例的终端设备、或者网络设备,并且该通信设备600可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由移动终端/终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the communication device 600 may specifically be a terminal device or a network device in an embodiment of the application, and the communication device 600 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the application. It's concise, so I won't repeat it here.
图16是本申请实施例的芯片的示意性结构图。图16所示的芯片700包括处理器710,处理器710可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip of an embodiment of the present application. The chip 700 shown in FIG. 16 includes a processor 710, and the processor 710 can call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,如图16所示,芯片700还可以包括存储器720。其中,处理器710可以从存储器720中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 16, the chip 700 may further include a memory 720. The processor 710 can call and run a computer program from the memory 720 to implement the method in the embodiments of the present application.
其中,存储器720可以是独立于处理器710的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器710中。The memory 720 may be a separate device independent of the processor 710, or may be integrated in the processor 710.
可选地,该芯片700还可以包括输入接口730。其中,处理器710可以控制该输入接口730与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。Optionally, the chip 700 may further include an input interface 730. The processor 710 can control the input interface 730 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
可选地,该芯片700还可以包括输出接口740。其中,处理器710可以控制该输出接口740与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。Optionally, the chip 700 may further include an output interface 740. The processor 710 can control the output interface 740 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can output information or data to other devices or chips.
可选地,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the chip can be applied to the network device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, details are not described herein again.
可选地,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the chip can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding process implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, no further description is provided here.
应理解,本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为系统级芯片,系统芯片,芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。It should be understood that the chips mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as system-level chips, system chips, chip systems, or system-on-chip chips.
图17是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统800的示意性框图。如图17所示,该通信系统800包括终端设备810和网络设备820。FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system 800 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17, the communication system 800 includes a terminal device 810 and a network device 820.
其中,该终端设备810可以用于实现上述方法中由终端设备实现的相应的功能,以及该网络设备820可以用于实现上述方法中由网络设备实现的相应的功能为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Among them, the terminal device 810 can be used to implement the corresponding function implemented by the terminal device in the above method, and the network device 820 can be used to implement the corresponding function implemented by the network device in the above method. .
应理解,本申请实施例的处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application  Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be understood that the processor of the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments may be completed by instructions in the form of hardware integrated logic circuits or software in the processor. The aforementioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module may be located in a mature storage medium in the art, such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory, an electrically erasable programmable memory, and a register. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be Read-Only Memory (ROM), Programmable Read-Only Memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), and Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example but not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (Static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to these and any other suitable types of memories.
应理解,上述存储器为示例性但不是限制性说明,例如,本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)以及直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)等等。也就是说,本申请实施例中的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It should be understood that the foregoing memory is exemplary but not limiting, for example, the memory in the embodiments of the present application may also be static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data) SDRAM (DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection Dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM) and so on. That is to say, the memories in the embodiments of the present application are intended to include but are not limited to these and any other suitable types of memories.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer programs.
可选的,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. For brevity, here No longer.
可选地,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由移动终端/终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application, for simplicity And will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.
可选的,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product may be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. Repeat again.
可选地,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的移动终端/终端设备,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由移动终端/终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application, For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序。The embodiment of the application also provides a computer program.
可选的,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program can be applied to the network device in the embodiment of the present application. When the computer program runs on the computer, the computer is allowed to execute the corresponding process implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. And will not be repeated here.
可选地,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的移动终端/终端设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由移动终端/终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiment of the present application. When the computer program runs on the computer, the computer executes each method in the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, the corresponding process will not be repeated here.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed in hardware or software depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and conciseness of the description, the specific working processes of the above-described systems, devices, and units can refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以 是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,)ROM、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or part of the contribution to the existing technology or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory,) ROM, random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited thereto. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (91)

  1. 一种数据复制传输的指示方法,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:A method for indicating data replication and transmission, applied to a network device, and the method includes:
    向终端设备发送第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息。Send first information to the terminal device; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, the first information One piece of information is used to determine binding information for data replication and transmission.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first information includes at least one of the following:
    逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between logical channels;
    数据无线承载DRB和/或信令无线承载SRB之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between data radio bearer DRB and/or signaling radio bearer SRB;
    载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between the carrier and the carried logical channel;
    载波之间的绑定关系。The binding relationship between carriers.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,所述对象为承载、无线链路层控制协议RLC实体、逻辑信道中之一。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the object is one of a bearer, a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity, and a logical channel.
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其中,所述逻辑信道为用于传输PDCP PDU或PDCP PDU的复制数据的逻辑信道。The method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the logical channel is a logical channel used to transmit PDCP PDU or PDCP PDU duplicate data.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,所述逻辑信道之间的绑定关系包括以下之一:The method according to claim 4, wherein the binding relationship between the logical channels includes one of the following:
    至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息;Binding relationship information of at least two logical channels;
    至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息;First type mode information of at least two logical channels;
    至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息。The second type mode information of at least two logical channels.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其中,所述至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息所指示的至少两个逻辑信道具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The method according to claim 5, wherein the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
    或者,or,
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息,包括至少一个模式;其中,同一模式内对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同模式之间所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;The first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes The use of copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status is the same or different;
    或者or
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息,包括至少一个全模式以及选择模式;其中,所述同一全模式中对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同的全模式之间对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;所述选择模式对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态分别进行指示。The second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying. The use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中,所述向终端设备发送第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein the sending the first information to the terminal device comprises:
    确定具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道;Confirm that there are at least two logical channels with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
    在向终端设备发送与所述至少两个逻辑信道对应的配置消息,所述配置信息用于指示所述第一信息;Sending configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the first information;
    其中,所述配置信息包括所述逻辑信道的绑定信息;当所述配置信息中指示的绑定信息为真时,表征所述逻辑信道为具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道中之一。Wherein, the configuration information includes the binding information of the logical channel; when the binding information indicated in the configuration information is true, it indicates that the logical channel is at least with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission. One of two logical channels.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 7, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过媒体访问控制MAC控制元素CE、无线资源控制RRC消息、下行控制信息DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;Indicate to the terminal device the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel through one of the media access control MAC control element CE, radio resource control RRC message, and downlink control information DCI;
    其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the CG identity of the cell group corresponding to the logical channel.
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述配置消息中还包括:逻辑信道所绑定的组标识;所述方法还包括:8. The method according to claim 7, wherein the configuration message further includes: a group identifier bound to the logical channel; the method further includes:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;Indicate to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所绑定的组标识。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the group identifier bound to the logical channel.
  10. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中,所述向终端设备发送第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein the sending the first information to the terminal device comprises:
    确定具备相同激活或去激活状态的至少两个逻辑信道;Determine at least two logical channels with the same activation or deactivation status;
    向终端设备发送所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一逻辑信道对应的配置信息;所述配置信息中包含有与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道的标识,和/或,与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。Send configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels to the terminal device; the configuration information contains the identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel, and/or The CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;Indicate to the terminal device the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel through one of the MAC control element CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下至少之一:逻辑信道、逻辑信道所所属的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: a logical channel and a CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
  12. 根据权利要求6-11任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一信息由RRC重配置消息携带。The method according to any one of claims 6-11, wherein the first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message.
  13. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。Through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI to indicate to the terminal device the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode, and/or, the status of using replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode or Do not use copy transfer status.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过不同行来指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,用于指示第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The method according to claim 13, wherein in one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, different rows are used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode, and /Or, used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode.
  15. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,选择模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。Use one of MAC CE, RRC message, or DCI to indicate to the terminal device the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode, and/or the use of copy transmission or not using the logical channel corresponding to the selected mode Copy the transmission status.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过第一行中的至少一个比特指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,通过第二行中的不同比特指示选择模式所对应的至少一个逻辑信道分别对应的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The method according to claim 15, wherein in one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, at least one bit in the first row indicates whether to use copy transmission or not to use copy of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode The transmission status, and/or, the at least one logical channel corresponding to the selected mode is used to indicate the copy transmission or non-replication transmission status respectively corresponding to the at least one logical channel corresponding to the selected mode through different bits in the second row.
  17. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的DRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态;The method according to claim 2, wherein the DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation status as the SRB and/or DRB ;
    或者,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的SRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态。Alternatively, the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 17, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;Instruct the terminal device to change the data copy transmission instruction through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有DRB或SRB的标识,或者,携带有DRB或SRB的标识、以及DRB或SRB对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
  19. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系,用于通过指示载波的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,确定承载的逻辑信道的是否传输复制数据。The method according to claim 2, wherein the binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel is transmitted by indicating whether the carrier is used for copy transmission or not using copy transmission status Copy the data.
  20. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述载波之间的绑定关系,用于指示具备绑定关系的至少两个载波具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The method according to claim 2, wherein the binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that the at least two carriers with the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or no copy transmission status.
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;Instruct the terminal device to change the data copy transmission instruction through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  22. 一种数据复制传输的指示方法,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:An instruction method for data copy transmission, applied to a terminal device, and the method includes:
    接收第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息.Receiving first information; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, the first information is used to determine Binding information for data replication transmission.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 22, wherein the first information includes at least one of the following:
    逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between logical channels;
    DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB;
    载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between the carrier and the carried logical channel;
    载波之间的绑定关系。The binding relationship between carriers.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法,其中,所述对象为承载、RLC、逻辑信道中之一。The method according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the object is one of bearer, RLC, and logical channel.
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的方法,其中,所述逻辑信道为用于传输PDCP PDU或PDCP PDU的复制数据的逻辑信道。The method according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the logical channel is a logical channel used to transmit PDCP PDU or PDCP PDU duplicate data.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其中,所述逻辑信道之间的绑定关系包括以下之一:The method according to claim 25, wherein the binding relationship between the logical channels comprises one of the following:
    至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息;Binding relationship information of at least two logical channels;
    至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息;First type mode information of at least two logical channels;
    至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息。The second type mode information of at least two logical channels.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其中,所述至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息所指示的至少两个逻辑信道具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The method according to claim 26, wherein the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
    或者,or,
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息,包括至少一个模式;其中,同一模式内对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同模式之间所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;The first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes The use of copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status is the same or different;
    或者or
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息,包括至少一个全模式以及选择模式;其中,所述同一全模式中对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同的全模式之间对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;所述选择模式对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态分别进行指示。The second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying. The use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其中,所述接收第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 27, wherein said receiving the first information comprises:
    接收与所述至少两个逻辑信道对应的配置消息,所述配置信息用于指示所述第一信息;其中,所述配置信息包括所述逻辑信道的绑定信息;当所述配置信息中指示的绑定信息为真时,表征所述逻辑信道为具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道中之一;Receiving configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels, where the configuration information is used to indicate the first information; wherein the configuration information includes the binding information of the logical channels; when the configuration information indicates When the binding information of is true, it characterizes that the logical channel is one of at least two logical channels with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
    基于所述配置消息,确定至少两个逻辑信道的绑定信息,以及根据初始复制数据传输方式控制至少两个逻辑信道进行传输。Based on the configuration message, the binding information of at least two logical channels is determined, and the at least two logical channels are controlled to transmit according to the initial replication data transmission mode.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 28, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一接收网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;Receive the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel indicated by the network side through one of the MAC control elements CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the CG identity of the cell group corresponding to the logical channel.
  30. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其中,所述配置消息中还包括:逻辑信道所绑定的组标识;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 28, wherein the configuration message further comprises: a group identifier bound to the logical channel; the method further comprises:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一接收网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;Use one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI to receive the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel indicated by the network side;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所绑定的组标识。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the group identifier bound to the logical channel.
  31. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其中,所述接收第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 27, wherein said receiving the first information comprises:
    接收网络侧发送的所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一逻辑信道对应的配置信息;所述配置信息中包含有与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道的标识,和/或,与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。Receiving configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels sent by the network side; the configuration information includes the identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel, and/or, and The CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 31, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;Obtain the status of using replication transmission or not using replication transmission of the logical channel indicated by the network side through one of the MAC control elements CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下至少之一:逻辑信道、逻辑信道所所属的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: a logical channel and a CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
  33. 根据权利要求27-32任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一信息由RRC重配置消息携带。The method according to any one of claims 27-32, wherein the first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message.
  34. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 26, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、和/或,第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。Use one of MAC CE, RRC message, or DCI to obtain the status of using replication transmission or non-use replication transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode, and/or use replication transmission or non-use of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode Copy the transmission status.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过不同行来指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,用于指示第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The method according to claim 34, wherein in one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, different rows are used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode, and /Or, used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode.
  36. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 26, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、以及选择模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。Obtain the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode and the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the selected mode through one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过第一行中的至少一个比特指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、以及通过第二行中的不同比特指示选择模式所对应的至少一个逻辑信道分别对应的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The method according to claim 36, wherein in one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, at least one bit in the first row indicates whether to use copy transmission or not to use copy of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode The transmission status and the at least one logical channel corresponding to the selected mode is indicated by different bits in the second row, respectively corresponding to the replication transmission or non-replication transmission status.
  38. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其中,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的DRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态;The method according to claim 23, wherein the DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation status as the SRB and/or DRB ;
    或者,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的SRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态。Alternatively, the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 38, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;Obtain the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有DRB或SRB的标识,或者,携带有DRB或SRB的标识以及DRB或SRB对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
  40. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其中,所述载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系,用于通过指示载波的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,确定承载的逻辑信道的是否传输复制数据。The method according to claim 23, wherein the binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel is transmitted by indicating whether the carrier is used for copy transmission or not using copy transmission status Copy the data.
  41. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其中,所述载波之间的绑定关系,用于指示具备绑定关系的至少两个载波具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。23. The method according to claim 23, wherein the binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers having the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or non-copy transmission status.
  42. 根据权利要求40或41所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 40 or 41, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;Obtain the data copy transmission change indication indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  43. 一种网络设备,包括:A network device, including:
    第一通信单元,向终端设备发送第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息.The first communication unit sends first information to the terminal device; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/ Or, the first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission.
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的网络设备,其中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:The network device according to claim 43, wherein the first information includes at least one of the following:
    逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between logical channels;
    DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB;
    载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between the carrier and the carried logical channel;
    载波之间的绑定关系。The binding relationship between carriers.
  45. 根据权利要求43或44所述的网络设备,其中,所述对象为承载、无线链路层控制协议RLC实体、逻辑信道中之一。The network device according to claim 43 or 44, wherein the object is one of a bearer, a radio link layer control protocol RLC entity, and a logical channel.
  46. 根据权利要求44或45所述的网络设备,其中,所述逻辑信道为用于传输PDCP PDU或PDCP PDU的复制数据的逻辑信道。The network device according to claim 44 or 45, wherein the logical channel is a logical channel used to transmit PDCP PDU or PDCP PDU duplicate data.
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的网络设备,其中,所述逻辑信道之间的绑定关系包括以下之一:The network device according to claim 46, wherein the binding relationship between the logical channels comprises one of the following:
    至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息;Binding relationship information of at least two logical channels;
    至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息;First type mode information of at least two logical channels;
    至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息。The second type mode information of at least two logical channels.
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的网络设备,其中,所述至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息所指示的至少两个逻辑信道具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The network device according to claim 47, wherein the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
    或者,or,
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息,包括至少一个模式;其中,同一模式内对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同模式之间所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;The first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes The use of copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status is the same or different;
    或者or
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息,包括至少一个全模式以及选择模式;其中,所述同一全模式中对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同的全模式之间对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;所述选择模式对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态分别进行指示。The second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying. The use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated.
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的网络设备,其中,所述网络设备,还包括:The network device according to claim 48, wherein the network device further comprises:
    第一处理单元,确定具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道;The first processing unit determines that there are at least two logical channels with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
    所述第一通信单元,在向终端设备发送与所述至少两个逻辑信道对应的配置消息,所述配置信息用于指示所述第一信息;The first communication unit is sending configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels to a terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the first information;
    其中,所述配置信息包括所述逻辑信道的绑定信息;当所述配置信息中指示的绑定信息为真时,表征所述逻辑信道为具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道中之一。Wherein, the configuration information includes the binding information of the logical channel; when the binding information indicated in the configuration information is true, it indicates that the logical channel is at least with the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission. One of two logical channels.
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的网络设备,其中,所述第一通信单元,通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The network device according to claim 49, wherein the first communication unit indicates to the terminal device the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel through one of a MAC control element CE, an RRC message, and DCI;
    其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the CG identity of the cell group corresponding to the logical channel.
  51. 根据权利要求49所述的网络设备,其中,所述第一通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The network device according to claim 49, wherein the first communication unit indicates to the terminal device the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所绑定的组标识。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the group identifier bound to the logical channel.
  52. 根据权利要求48所述的网络设备,其中,所述网络设备,还包括:The network device according to claim 48, wherein the network device further comprises:
    第一处理单元,确定具备相同激活或去激活状态的至少两个逻辑信道;The first processing unit determines at least two logical channels with the same activation or deactivation state;
    所述第一通信单元,向终端设备发送所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一逻辑信道对应的配置信息;所述配置信息中包含有与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道的标识,和/或,与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。The first communication unit sends configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels to the terminal device; the configuration information includes the identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel , And/or, the CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的网络设备,其中,所述第一通信单元,通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The network device according to claim 52, wherein the first communication unit indicates to the terminal device the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel through one of the MAC control element CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下至少之一:逻辑信道、逻辑信道所所属的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: a logical channel and a CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
  54. 根据权利要求48-53任一项所述的网络设备,其中,所述第一信息由RRC重配置消息携带。The network device according to any one of claims 48-53, wherein the first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message.
  55. 根据权利要求48所述的网络设备,其中,所述第一通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The network device according to claim 48, wherein the first communication unit instructs the terminal device to use copy transmission or not to use copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI Status, and/or status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode.
  56. 根据权利要求55所述的网络设备,其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过不同行来指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,用于指示第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The network device according to claim 55, wherein in one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, different rows indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode, And/or, it is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode.
  57. 根据权利要求48所述的网络设备,其中,所述第一通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,选择模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The network device according to claim 48, wherein the first communication unit indicates to the terminal device the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI , And/or, select whether to use copy transmission or not to use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the mode.
  58. 根据权利要求57所述的网络设备,其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过第一行中的至少一个比特指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,通过第二行中的不同比特指示选择模式所对应的至少一个逻辑信道分别对应的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The network device according to claim 57, wherein in one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, at least one bit in the first row indicates the use, replication, or non-use of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode The copy transmission status, and/or, the at least one logical channel corresponding to the selection mode is used to indicate the copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status respectively corresponding to the at least one logical channel corresponding to the selected mode through different bits in the second row.
  59. 根据权利要求44所述的网络设备,其中,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的DRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态;The network device according to claim 44, wherein the DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation as the SRB and/or DRB status;
    或者,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的SRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态。Alternatively, the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的网络设备,其中,所述第一通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;The network device according to claim 59, wherein the first communication unit instructs the terminal device to change the data copy transmission instruction through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有DRB或SRB的标识,或者,携带有DRB或SRB的标识、以及DRB或SRB对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
  61. 根据权利要求44所述的网络设备,其中,所述载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系,用于通过指示载波的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,确定承载的逻辑信道的是否传输复制数据。The network device according to claim 44, wherein the binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel is valid by indicating whether the carrier is used to replicate transmission or not to use replicated transmission. Transfer copied data.
  62. 根据权利要求44所述的网络设备,其中,所述载波之间的绑定关系,用于指示具备绑定关系的至少两个载波具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The network device according to claim 44, wherein the binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers having the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or non-copy transmission status.
  63. 根据权利要求61或62所述的网络设备,其中,所述第一通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一向终端设备指示数据复制传输的变更指示;The network device according to claim 61 or 62, wherein the first communication unit indicates to the terminal device a change instruction of data copy transmission through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  64. 一种终端设备,包括:A terminal device, including:
    第二通信单元,接收第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于表征数据复制传输的绑定信息,所述第一信息中所指示的对象使用相同的复制传输状态;和/或,所述第一信息用于确定数据复制传输的绑定信息。The second communication unit receives first information; wherein the first information is used to characterize binding information for data replication transmission, and the objects indicated in the first information use the same replication transmission status; and/or, The first information is used to determine binding information for data replication transmission.
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的终端设备,其中,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:The terminal device according to claim 64, wherein the first information includes at least one of the following:
    逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between logical channels;
    DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between DRB and/or SRB;
    载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系;The binding relationship between the carrier and the carried logical channel;
    载波之间的绑定关系。The binding relationship between carriers.
  66. 根据权利要求64或65所述的终端设备,其中,所述对象为承载、RLC、逻辑信道中之一。The terminal device according to claim 64 or 65, wherein the object is one of bearer, RLC, and logical channel.
  67. 根据权利要求65或66所述的终端设备,其中,所述逻辑信道为用于传输PDCP PDU或PDCP PDU的复制数据的逻辑信道。The terminal device according to claim 65 or 66, wherein the logical channel is a logical channel used to transmit PDCP PDU or PDCP PDU duplicate data.
  68. 根据权利要求67所述的终端设备,其中,所述逻辑信道之间的绑定关系包括以下之一:The terminal device according to claim 67, wherein the binding relationship between the logical channels comprises one of the following:
    至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息;Binding relationship information of at least two logical channels;
    至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息;First type mode information of at least two logical channels;
    至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息。The second type mode information of at least two logical channels.
  69. 根据权利要求68所述的终端设备,其中,所述至少两个逻辑信道的绑定关系信息所指示的至少两个逻辑信道具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The terminal device according to claim 68, wherein the at least two logical channels indicated by the binding relationship information of the at least two logical channels have the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
    或者,or,
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的第一类模式信息,包括至少一个模式;其中,同一模式内对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同模式之间所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;The first-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same mode have the same transmission status with or without copying, and the corresponding logical channels between different modes The use of copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status is the same or different;
    或者or
    所述至少两个逻辑信道的第二类模式信息,包括至少一个全模式以及选择模式;其中,所述同一全模式中对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同,且不同的全模式之间对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态相同或不同;所述选择模式对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态分别进行指示。The second-type mode information of the at least two logical channels includes at least one full mode and a selection mode; wherein, the corresponding logical channels in the same full mode have the same and different transmission status with or without copying. The use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the corresponding logical channels between all modes are the same or different; the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission states of the logical channels corresponding to the selected mode are respectively indicated.
  70. 根据权利要求69所述的终端设备,其中,所述终端设备还包括:The terminal device according to claim 69, wherein the terminal device further comprises:
    第二处理单元,基于所述配置消息,确定至少两个逻辑信道的绑定信息,以及根据初始复制数据传输方式控制至少两个逻辑信道进行传输The second processing unit, based on the configuration message, determines the binding information of at least two logical channels, and controls the at least two logical channels to transmit according to the initial replication data transmission mode
    所述第二通信单元,接收与所述至少两个逻辑信道对应的配置消息,所述配置信息用于指示所述第一信息;其中,所述配置信息包括所述逻辑信道的绑定信息;当所述配置信息中指示的绑定信息为真时,表征所述逻辑信道为具备相同使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态的至少两个逻辑信道中之一。The second communication unit receives configuration messages corresponding to the at least two logical channels, where the configuration information is used to indicate the first information; wherein the configuration information includes binding information of the logical channels; When the binding information indicated in the configuration information is true, it characterizes that the logical channel is one of at least two logical channels having the same status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission.
  71. 根据权利要求70所述的终端设备,其中,所述第二通信单元,通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一接收网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The terminal device according to claim 70, wherein the second communication unit receives the use copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel indicated by the network side through one of the MAC control element CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所对应的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the CG identity of the cell group corresponding to the logical channel.
  72. 根据权利要求70所述的终端设备,其中,所述配置消息中还包括:逻辑信道所绑定的组标识;所述第二通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一接收网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The terminal device according to claim 70, wherein the configuration message further includes: a group identifier bound to a logical channel; the second communication unit receives the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI The status of the indicated logical channel using copy transmission or not using copy transmission;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带逻辑信道所绑定的组标识。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries the group identifier bound to the logical channel.
  73. 根据权利要求69所述的终端设备,其中,所述第二通信单元,接收网络侧发送的所述至少两个逻辑信道中的第一逻辑信道对应的配置信息;所述配置信息中包含有与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道的标识,和/或,与所述第一逻辑信道绑定的逻辑信道所属的CG标识。The terminal device according to claim 69, wherein the second communication unit receives configuration information corresponding to the first logical channel of the at least two logical channels sent by the network side; and the configuration information includes The identifier of the logical channel bound to the first logical channel, and/or the CG identifier to which the logical channel bound to the first logical channel belongs.
  74. 根据权利要求73所述的终端设备,其中,所述第二通信单元,通过MAC控制元素CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态;The terminal device according to claim 73, wherein the second communication unit obtains the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel indicated by the network side through one of the MAC control element CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带以下至少之一:逻辑信道、逻辑信道所所属的小区组CG标识。Wherein, one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: a logical channel and a CG identity of the cell group to which the logical channel belongs.
  75. 根据权利要求69-74任一项所述的终端设备,其中,所述第一信息由RRC重配置消息携带。The terminal device according to any one of claims 69-74, wherein the first information is carried by an RRC reconfiguration message.
  76. 根据权利要求68所述的终端设备,其中,所述第二通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、和/或,第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The terminal device according to claim 68, wherein the second communication unit acquires the status of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode using copy transmission or not using copy transmission through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, And/or, the state of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode.
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的终端设备,其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过不同行来指示第一模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,和/或,用于指示第二模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The terminal device according to claim 76, wherein in one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, different rows indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the first mode, And/or, it is used to indicate the status of using copy transmission or not using copy transmission of the logical channel corresponding to the second mode.
  78. 根据权利要求68所述的终端设备,其中,所述第二通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、以及选择模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The terminal device according to claim 68, wherein the second communication unit obtains the copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, and Select whether to use copy transmission or not to use copy transmission status of the logical channel corresponding to the mode.
  79. 根据权利要求78所述的终端设备,其中,所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中,通过第一行中的至少一个比特指示全模式所对应的逻辑信道的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态、以及通过第二行中的不同比特指示选择模式所对应的至少一个逻辑信道分别对应的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The terminal device according to claim 78, wherein in one of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI, at least one bit in the first row indicates the use, copy transmission or non-use of the logical channel corresponding to the full mode The copy transmission status and the at least one logical channel corresponding to the selected mode are indicated by different bits in the second row, respectively corresponding to the copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status.
  80. 根据权利要求65所述的终端设备,其中,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的DRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态;The terminal device according to claim 65, wherein the DRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation as the SRB and/or DRB status;
    或者,所述DRB和/或SRB之间的绑定关系中所指示的SRB、与SRB和/或DRB具备相同的数据复制传输激活或数据复制传输去激活状态。Alternatively, the SRB indicated in the binding relationship between the DRB and/or SRB has the same data replication transmission activation or data replication transmission deactivation state as the SRB and/or DRB.
  81. 根据权利要求80所述的终端设备,其中,所述第二通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;The terminal device according to claim 80, wherein the second communication unit obtains the data copy transmission change instruction indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有DRB或SRB的标识,或者,携带有DRB或SRB的标识以及DRB或SRB对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries an identification of DRB or SRB, or carries an identification of DRB or SRB and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to DRB or SRB transmits replicated data.
  82. 根据权利要求65所述的终端设备,其中,所述载波与承载的逻辑信道之间的绑定关系,用于通过指示载波的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态,确定承载的逻辑信道的是否传输复制数据。The terminal device according to claim 65, wherein the binding relationship between the carrier and the bearer logical channel is used to determine whether the bearer logical channel is valid by indicating whether the carrier is used for copy transmission or not. Transfer copied data.
  83. 根据权利要求65所述的终端设备,其中,所述载波之间的绑定关系,用于指示具备绑定关系的至少两个载波具备相同的使用复制传输或不使用复制传输状态。The terminal device according to claim 65, wherein the binding relationship between the carriers is used to indicate that at least two carriers having the binding relationship have the same copy transmission or non-use copy transmission status.
  84. 根据权利要求82或83所述的终端设备,其中,所述第二通信单元,通过MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一获取网络侧指示的数据复制传输的变更指示;The terminal device according to claim 82 or 83, wherein the second communication unit obtains the data copy transmission change instruction indicated by the network side through one of MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI;
    所述MAC CE、RRC消息、DCI中之一中携带有以下至少之一:载波的标识、载波所属的小区组标识、以及载波对应的逻辑信道是否传输复制数据的指示。One of the MAC CE, RRC message, and DCI carries at least one of the following: the identity of the carrier, the identity of the cell group to which the carrier belongs, and an indication of whether the logical channel corresponding to the carrier transmits replicated data.
  85. 一种网络设备,包括:处理器和用于存储能够在处理器上运行的计算机程序的存储器,A network device, including: a processor and a memory for storing a computer program that can run on the processor,
    其中,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行如权利要求1-21任一项所述方法的步骤。Wherein, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1-21.
  86. 一种终端设备,包括:处理器和用于存储能够在处理器上运行的计算机程序的存储器,A terminal device includes: a processor and a memory for storing a computer program that can run on the processor,
    其中,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行如权利要求22-42任一项所述方法的步骤。Wherein, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the steps of the method according to any one of claims 22-42.
  87. 一种芯片,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求1-21中任一项所述的方法。A chip comprising: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the method according to any one of claims 1-21.
  88. 一种芯片,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求22-42中任一项所述的方法。A chip comprising: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the method according to any one of claims 22-42.
  89. 一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求1-42任一项所述方法的步骤。A computer-readable storage medium used to store a computer program that enables a computer to execute the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1-42.
  90. 一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行如权利要求1-42中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, comprising computer program instructions that cause a computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-42.
  91. 一种计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求1-42中任一项所述的方法。A computer program that causes a computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-42.
PCT/CN2019/072056 2019-01-16 2019-01-16 Indication method for data replication and transmission, terminal device, and network device WO2020147054A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201980057236.XA CN112655234B (en) 2019-01-16 2019-01-16 Indication method for data copying transmission, terminal equipment and network equipment
PCT/CN2019/072056 WO2020147054A1 (en) 2019-01-16 2019-01-16 Indication method for data replication and transmission, terminal device, and network device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/072056 WO2020147054A1 (en) 2019-01-16 2019-01-16 Indication method for data replication and transmission, terminal device, and network device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020147054A1 true WO2020147054A1 (en) 2020-07-23

Family

ID=71613010

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/072056 WO2020147054A1 (en) 2019-01-16 2019-01-16 Indication method for data replication and transmission, terminal device, and network device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112655234B (en)
WO (1) WO2020147054A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024051656A1 (en) * 2022-09-07 2024-03-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 Sidelink (sl) duplication transmission method, and terminal and network-side device

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115884392A (en) * 2021-09-26 2023-03-31 维沃移动通信有限公司 MD transmission method, MD transmission equipment and readable storage medium

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107241164A (en) * 2017-05-05 2017-10-10 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of radio bearer repeats the processing method and processing device of transmission
CN107342851A (en) * 2017-06-15 2017-11-10 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of configuration for repeating transmission and repetitive transmission method and device
WO2018075828A1 (en) * 2016-10-19 2018-04-26 Convida Wireless, Llc Apparatus
CN108632809A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of Activiation method and equipment for duplicate data transmission

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10536878B2 (en) * 2017-03-24 2020-01-14 Mediatek Inc. User equipment and methods for PDCP duplication in 5G RAN
CN108631980B (en) * 2017-03-24 2021-03-05 电信科学技术研究院 Data transmission method, terminal, network side device and computer readable storage medium
CN108668367B (en) * 2017-04-01 2020-06-02 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method, network equipment and terminal
CN113316219B (en) * 2017-04-19 2022-07-29 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for repeated transmission
CN108809476B (en) * 2017-04-27 2021-04-06 电信科学技术研究院 Method and equipment for data transmission

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018075828A1 (en) * 2016-10-19 2018-04-26 Convida Wireless, Llc Apparatus
CN108632809A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of Activiation method and equipment for duplicate data transmission
CN107241164A (en) * 2017-05-05 2017-10-10 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of radio bearer repeats the processing method and processing device of transmission
CN107342851A (en) * 2017-06-15 2017-11-10 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of configuration for repeating transmission and repetitive transmission method and device

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024051656A1 (en) * 2022-09-07 2024-03-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 Sidelink (sl) duplication transmission method, and terminal and network-side device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112655234A (en) 2021-04-13
CN112655234B (en) 2023-06-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018227555A1 (en) Data transmission method, terminal device, and network device
CN114222331B (en) Data transmission method and terminal equipment
US20210345178A1 (en) Method and device used for duplicate data transmission
WO2020051774A1 (en) Communication method, terminal device, and network device
CN113766571B (en) Data transmission method and communication equipment
WO2020043009A1 (en) Ui display method and apparatus, and terminal device and storage medium
JP2023505943A (en) SRS pathloss RS activation or update method and device
WO2020147054A1 (en) Indication method for data replication and transmission, terminal device, and network device
CN113597007A (en) Transmission resource selection method, network equipment and user equipment
WO2019127289A1 (en) Data transmission method and terminal device
US20210250810A1 (en) Data replication transmission configuration method, apparatus, chip, and computer program
WO2020000174A1 (en) Core network selection method and apparatus, terminal device and network device
CN113068225B (en) Information indication method and device, and terminal
WO2021016790A1 (en) Method for radio communication, terminal device, and network device
CN112586016B (en) Data replication transmission control method, terminal equipment and network equipment
EP4030819B1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
CN112640509B (en) Data copying and transmitting processing method, terminal equipment and network equipment
WO2020147052A1 (en) Method for controlling data duplication transmission, terminal device and network device
WO2020042977A1 (en) Ui display method and apparatus, terminal device, and storage medium
WO2020042976A1 (en) Ui display method, apparatus, terminal device, and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19910514

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19910514

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1